Home

DDN SFA10000 (SFA OS V1.4.0) User Guide

1. 000 DOSOOOOOLOONOOLOOLEOOOCOOI A i mm A mm Bem m mm Om m Ao DOG OOO000000000000000000 89905980 00000 0000 BESES LEDE O000000000000000000000000000 NF BO0000000000000000000 je AALESOOOO0000000000000000000 OOOO oooi paana aa aaa a a T as aa Ta Tahaa aTa Ta aTa Ts DO AAEESOGO00000000000000000000 4 po oooooooooooo oo I OOEOP0O0E00000000000000000000 He ik i oo ooo N 0000000000 Ion SER T ogooro OOO0000000 I n m O0EEAACTHHAHE HE 3 QOOO0ORO OOO0000000 q I E BSeeEdeee Geese 1 HILSNCSLOBPOOOOO oomoo D Wa aAa AM DOOOCOOO OIOOCOCCCOOCOO 0 0000000 0 PER Ft Se e f gt i COMOOSGUE BI il T J T OOROONOCOCO00000000 ee ae Be O OOOOooOoOoooOoOoO 00 on O i I In 1 L vi ooro 0 oq pacacosa 3 7 TA ET Tb ll SEE Power Supply Ethernet USB Ports 5 232 Module 2 Port Port Disk Channels o orts P
2. DataDirect NETWORKS SFA10000 DISKA DISKB DISKS eee RS G ner all 1 FAN 1 FAN 2 KSE FAN 3 KS 72FENSSUN O APFENBSRU gPENSS AULA ZLUONA A Hi h ALBA FEO aar A Pal HIONZONSGE KONV DSSEN Ej i no H i HAN yO OCRE PADI une aq i J H RIG I E N OG ia BSS He E0000 ORSON EEN o e ss bl snu Emme I 10 0 Bagn 9 Fan Modules x4 Control Buttons LEDs 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 5 The SFA10000 System Hardware At the back there are two power supply modules and various I O connectors Figure 4 and Figure 5 illustrate the rear views of the SFA10000 and SFA10000E controllers respectively Figure 4 SFA10000 Controller Rear View Power Supply Host Ports Module 1 IB Inter Controller Link IB Inter Controller Link Client Channels
3. 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 25 Cable Connections Figure 26 Connecting 5 x S2460 Enclosures to SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 000 Disk Enclosure 2 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 002 Disk Enclosure 3 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 010 Disk Enclosure 4 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 012 Disk Enclosure 5 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 040 96 00259 001 Rev C Data
4. InfiniBand ICL InfiniBand ICL EE eee ee i I RP1 I eee eee l I Management I Network i I f SS SR a n a I I I RPO i i ee ee RE I i So I I Cy m I j A C3 DO O I f WEMEL IIN e eao i i Gea Disk Channels Ethernet ICL y 4 FC or 2 IB Host Ports UPS VGA Monitor RS 232 Figure 11 SFA10000E Controller I O Ports Host Ports Disk Channels InfiniBand ICL ae a ee re I I Management OO ao Fi i Network i 2 Ce I bed I I I I i 1 2 I I SS Se Sa BESS Lao eS ae EE E EEE ER I Ty Te Ties a l 2 1 I I HL AE ax JO B 3 7 Host Ports Ethernet ICL Are KUE RS 232 SYS OS VGA Monitor 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 10 The SFA10000 System Hardware The Management Network Ethernet port provides remote monitoring and configuration capabilities The colors of the LEDs indicate the link speed and activities Figure 12 Figure 12 Management Network Ethernet Port LED Color Scheme Link Act LED Color Status ra Speed Solid Orange 1000 Mb s T Solid Green 100 Mb s Off 10 Mb s Speed Link Activity Solid Green Link established and idle Flashing Green
5. 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 28 Cable Connections 2 5 3 Host Connections 2531 SFA10000 Connect the controller host ports shown in Figure 29 either directly to your hosts or to switch that connects your hosts Depending on your SFA10000 model these connections may be Fibre Channel or InfiniBand NOTE Do NOT use the unused Inter Controller Link connectors to connect InfiniBand hosts or switches Figure 29 Host Ports on SFA10000 Controllers y With Fibre Channel Host Ports I NOT for I i lt t RP1 Host _ gt i Host Connections Ports i g B egg Weslo Ege y RPQ _ gt 23101 Host NESS J Ports y With InfiniBand Host Ports a i NOT for I i RP1 Host _ i Host i l I Ports Connections l i FS FE FE FEE i RPO 1 2 Host las SSS seeee l Ports
6. 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 21 Cable Connections 2 5 2 Disk Enclosure Cabling The SFA10000 systems are shipped with the cables attached between the disk enclosures and controller s I O channels NOTE Incorrect wiring can prevent the system from operating correctly or from operating at all Verify that the disk enclosures are correctly connected to the two controllers using the figures listed in the tables below The cables are labeled by ports to which they will be connected In the illustrations the port numbers are colored to aid in locating matching cables SFA10000 configurations using SS6000 enclosures Figure 23 Five enclosures Figure 24 Ten enclosures Figure 25 Twenty enclosures SFA10000 configurations using SS7000 enclosures that contain either SAS disks NearLine SAS disks or SATA physical disks with a SAS to SATA bridge interposers Figure 23 Five enclosures Figure 24 Ten enclosures Figure 25 Twenty enclosures SFA10000 configuration using SS2460 enclosures Figure 26 Five enclosures containing SAS disks only SFA10000E configurations Figure 27 Five S
7. 25 32 SFA10000E Connect the controllers host ports either directly to your file system clients or to a switch that connects your clients together The SFA10000E supports InfiniBand IB 10G Ethernet or a combination of the two The type of cable used depends upon your client network and application needs The required cables are shipped with your SFA10000E If not please contact DDN Technical Support The host ports are numbered as shown in Figure 30 For each host card on the controller the cables can be connected in one of the following configurations Port 1 Port 2 1 IB IB 2 10Ge 10Ge 3 IB 10Ge 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 29 Cable Connections NOTE A combination of IB and 10Ge cables can only be used in one configuration 3 above Figure 30 Host Ports on SFA10000E Controllers Host Ports 2 5 4 Management Network Connection You may remotely monitor the system over your Ethernet network Connect the controllers to your network using the Ethernet port as shown in Figure 31 The Ethernet managem
8. Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B CO CO Disk Enclosure 2 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 001 021 121 Disk Enclo 003 Disk Enclo 010 Disk Enclo 012 Disk Enclo 013 Disk Enclo 040 Disk E O 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 24 Cable Connections Figure 25 Connecting 20 x 60 Bay Enclosures to SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 Disk Enclosure 11 I O Module A 1 0 Module B 1 0 Module A 1 O Module B 000 020 050 120 150 031 055 131 155
9. be replaced immediately In both cases the battery life remaining is reported should be replaced within N days Note that if the battery replacement is overdue then the error will read as something like 10 days ago These events will also be logged while the controller is running as they cross the thresholds at 30 and 0 days of battery life remaining Note that there will be two other events that are logged with these which are logged any time the battery changes state These events should occur on the order of once a year so there should be limited traffic to the event log Note that LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT may occur for other reasons than the battery reached its end of life 000486 2010 11 12 12 54 52 3214473 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES BATTERY END OF LIFE PASSED ES Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 has reached its end of life 0 days ago and should be replaced immediately 000487 2010 11 12 12 54 52 3214503 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES ENCL UPS INFO ES UPS for controller 0xc2999211d0001 changed state SES status 2 disabled 0 charge 1 hold up time 2 min 000488 2010 11 12 12 54 52 3214512 G 61 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT ES UPS for controller 0xc2999211d0001 indicates that its battery should be replaced SES 2 0 0 8 5 5 3
10. ccecee cece eee ees 93 3 11 3 4 Disk Shelf Upgrade ec ccccce cece RE REDE ket 93 3 11 4 Physical Disk Firmware Update Procedure cece ee eee eee ees 96 3 11 4 1 Linux Environment Firmware Upload cccc cece cece cece teens 96 3 11 42 Windows Environment Firmware Upload cece cece cece cece 97 3 11 4 3 Physical Disk Upgrade SEE SEERE ETERN 97 302 Me Sem LOGS LESS ESSEN eve brann 99 3 12 1 Displaying Event Logs eee e cece cece ence cnet eee crits distra 99 3 122 Event Log Structure sanne haarhivesdr areal eds acai we 100 3 12 3 SFA OS Terms in the Log cece cece eee cece eee cent een EFENA 100 3 13 Remote Management of SFA10000 eee e cece e cece ee nneet eee eeeeenaes 101 3 13 1 Network Connection asanenenenennenenenennanenenenennanenenenener 101 3 13 2 Display Network Interface Attributes 0 eee eee eee e nent eens 101 3 13 3 Change Network Interface Settings cece eee eee e cence teen aes 101 3134 LOGINS iccse dias heen nd eae d ene SY Need NE Eay gren ee Seas Gee sk deo 102 3 13 5 Email and SNMP Notification Setup 0c cece cece eee e eee eee nee 102 31351 EmailSetups uuurvv ute ddaus nidaniadex yess riauadedeuseprennmnexebevles 102 31352 SNMP Setup incra ar AN dase onde ceencned sega STEERER a PENNEN 103 3 13 5 3 Inquiry Items and Events cece eee eee eee eee eeneeeee
11. Controller 0 s USB Cable UPS Controller 1 Controller 1 s UPS The UPS units are shipped with the batteries disconnected Follow these steps to connect the batteries 1 Remove the front bezel of the unit 2 Fasten the two connectors together Figure 34 Note that it is normal if you see a spark and hear a pop sound as you connect the battery 3 Replace the front bezel 4 Repeat the above steps on the other UPS Figure 34 Connect UPS Battery 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 31 Powering On the System 2 5 7 Power Connections 1 Verify your AC power source by measuring the AC voltage 2 Refer to the illustrations in Figure 35 and verify that the DIP switches on the back of both UPS units are correctly set NOTE Changing the voltage of the UPS requires more steps than just changing the DIP switches If the settings are incorrect have a DDN field engineer correct them Figure 35 DIP Switch Settings on UPS Rear Panel Nominal Input Voltage 208 230 240 Input Voltage Range 198 233 207 243 216 254 OFF OFF
12. E S 2 Q Metal Spacer 5 Push the front bracket onto rack Figure 191 Optional M6x10L screws can be used to secure the rails with posts if needed Figure 191 Attach Slides to Rack 2 d L Y N o x wo T c o 2 Q O DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 165 96 00259 001 Rev C Rack Installation Procedure 6 Similarly attach the end bracket to the rear of rack Figure 192 Figure 192 Attach Slides to Rack 3 p VEE ee End Bracket BNWON NEN WAN 1B BERE 7 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 166 Rack Installation Procedure 7 Slide the two inner rails onto the chassis hooks on both sides of the controller Figure 193 Figure 193 Attach Inner Rails to Chassis 8 Secure the inner rails using two screws on each side near the rear of chassis Figure 194 Figure 194 Secure Inner Rails 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 167 96 00259 001 Rev C Rack Installation Procedure 9 Then push the chassis into slides to complete rack installation Figure 195 CAUTION The main purpose of the chassis handles is for rackmount use only The controll
13. NOTE In switch environments you may disable enable the ports on the switch to identify which physical connection you are dealing with Utilizing one or more of the techniques above you can document an association between the physical host and the discovered initiators on the storage Example of showing imported initiators RAID 1 application show initiator Initiator Identifier 0x20000000c98107cb 0x10000000c98107cb a co test d08 0x20000000c9813a47 0x10000000c9813a47 l co test d10 0x20000000c9813a46 0x10000000c9813a46 lt a co test d10 0x20000000c98107ca 0x10000000c98107ca j co test d08 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2100001b32827e95 lt q co ls Host Index Type Index 00004 FC 0x010600 00006 FC 0x010900 00007 FC 0x010a00 00008 FC 0x010300 00011 FC 0x010200 00012 FC 0x010800 0x2001001b32a27e95 0x2101001b32a27e95 l co ls1 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 74 3 6 5 3 3 6 5 4 96 00259 001 Rev C Import Discovered Initiators Presentations Now identify the WWN and the discovered initiator index number with the host and its index number and import the appropriate discovered initiator to an association with the appropriate host Example of importing discovered initiators RAID 1 application import discovered 11 host 304 INITIATOR 12 OID 0x2d66000c imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 11 OID 0x3000000b STATUS Success 0x0 RAI
14. NOTE You may present a virtual disk to ALL hosts This may be appropriate in some limited system environments however it is best practice to not MIX the presentations where some VDs are selectively presented while others are presented all Managing at the host end may become confusing To present a virtual disk to ALL hosts promiscuous mode use the command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt VD id gt HOST ALL NOTE The promiscuous mode may not be used with persistent reservations The above setting will cause SCSI2 3 Reservation commands to fail 3551 Create Host Object The following example demonstrates presenting 6 virtual disks to 3 separate hosts 2 Windows hosts and a Linux host from a single storage subsystem Although this configuration will have a FC Switch the steps are identical NOTE Inthe example below the CLUI is operating in the RAID subject mode The ASM Application Stack Management commands must be preceded by the subject application Examples RAID 1 application create host name co lsl ostype Linux HOST 301 OID 0xld5e012d creation STATUS Success 0x0 UD wn RAID 1 application create host name co test dlO ostype windows HOST 302 OID 0x1d5f012e creation STATUS Success 0x0 DU Ur RAID 1 app create host name co test d08 ostype windows HOST 303 OID 0x1d60012f creation STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networ
15. Recommendations e Commands entered through the CLI may take a shortened form of the unique word as demonstrated in the above examples e Spaces may be used in place of sign in command syntax DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 75 Presentations Example of list of candidate virtual disks for presentation RAID 1 show vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 49 vd 49 29 READY 29 6 1400 WI 1 L O0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 50 vd 50 30 READY 30 6 1400 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 51 vd 51 31 READY 31 al 344 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 52 vd 52 32 READY 32 1 344 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 53 vd 53 33 READY 33 5 1400 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 54 vd 54 34 READY 34 5 1400 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 55 vd 55 35 READY 35 6 3608 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 56 vd 56 36 READY 36 6 3608 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 57 vd 57 37 READY 37 5 3608 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 58 vd 58 38 READY 38 5 3608 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 59 vd 59 39 READY 39 1 344 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 60 vd 60 41 READY 41 il 896 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 12 Example of creating VD presentation to Windows host co test d10 not specifying SCSI LUN ID The next two VDs are presented to a Windows host and the subsystem assigns the SCSI LUN ID RAID 1 application create presentation vd 51 host 305 PRESENTATION 2482 OID 0x256e09b2 creation STATUS
16. a E x AS 6 SAS SAS SAS S 1 2 3 N BACK CREATE SPARE POOL CANCEL 4 8 4 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool To assign a spare pool to a storage pool select Pools gt Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy At the Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy screen Figure 152 make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If the Select Spare Pool entry shows NONE no spare pool will serve this storage pool Figure 152 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS SPARE POOL DRIVE ASSIGN POLICY INDEX POOLNAME RAID STATE SELECTSPAREPOOL SELECTDRIVETYPE SELECT SPINDLE SPEED SELECT DRIVE SIZE GB 0 DONT CARE 16 poole RAIDS NORMAL spare poor22 F SATA E 7200rem El 186368 47 pookt7 RADS NORMAL Noe E SATA E 7200RPM E 1863 cB 18 pookt8 RAD6 NORMAL NONE J SATA E 7200RPM E 186368 19 pool 19 RAID6 none E SATA EF 7200RPM El 1863 GB 20 pool 20 e None 3 SATA EJ 7200RPM El 186368 Cancer 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 128 Spare Pools 4 8 5 Set Spare Pool Attributes To change the spare pool s attributes select Pools gt Set Spare Pool Attributes At the Set Attributes for Pool screen Figure 153 click to select the spare pool whose attributes you want to change Make the desired changes Click U
17. In no event will DataDirect Networks Licensor s and their directors officers employees or agents collectively DataDirect Networks Licensors be liable to you for any consequential incidental or indirect damages including damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information and the like arising out of the use or inability to use the software even if DataDirect Networks Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages the above limitations may not apply to you DataDirect Networks Licensor s liability to you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever and regardless of the form of the action whether in contract tort including negligence product liability or otherwise will be limited to 50 Document Number 96 00259 001 Rev C Jun 2011 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide ii Important Information STANDARD WARRANTY Definitions This two year limited warranty applies to the following DataDirect Networks network infrastructure and individual SAN solution components that include Silicon Storage Appliance Hardware Disk Modules RAID Hardware Components Storage Hardware Components and Disk Docking Bays and Enclosures hereinafter DataDirect Networks Products Fibre Channel Interface Kits SCSI In
18. 0x25ae0 PD OID 090 POOL OID Oxidbfoois Formatted Capacity 1824 GB Raw Capacity 1863 GB Available Disk Ch 01 NA NA NA 00 02 00 00 Enabled Disk Paths Oxlbs Oxlc4 Disk Slot s z NOTE If asterisks appear in the Physical Disk column when you attempt to view the advanced disk information or attempt to locate a disk this shows that only one controller sees the disk Therefore a controller is down or another hardware issue exists somewhere 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 115 Physical Disks Menu 4 4 2 Locate Disks To locate a disk in the enclosure select Physical Disk gt Locate Disks In the Locate screen Figure 129 click to select the disk The lower half of the Locate screen displays the disk slot into which the disk is installed Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of the disk module Figure 129 Locate Disks Screen PHYSICAL SPEED POOL PO MEMBER SPARE capacity DISK ENCL VENDOR PRODUCT NE ek OD RPM NAME EAT STATE Stare POOL GB SLOT OSURE DD PRODUCTID revisjon SERIAL NUMBER 144 Ox25ae0090 SATA 7200 poo GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS TA 7200 P90 GOD READY NORMAL 1883 2 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRWEXP 7200 GOD READY NORMAL 1863 3 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOHHSN oe BOOD READY NORMAL 1863 4 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YA
19. Description LOG_RT_SNMP_TRAP_EVENT Event received LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE A member of a storage pool has changed its status Table 5 SNMP and Email Notification Events SNMP and Email Notification Events Error Description LOG AMPD MPI IOC INIT FAIL SAS SATA channel has failed to initialize LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT ERROR Enclosure cooling element has reported an error condition LOG ES CTLR PWR SRC CHANGED Controller power source has changed LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT UPS for the controller indicates that its battery should be replaced LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN INTF UPS for the controller indicates that its interface has failed Check the cable LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN UPS UPS for the controller indicates that it has failed LOG ES EXPANDER ELEMENT ERROR A DEM or an I O module has reported an error condition LOG ES POWER SUPPLY ERROR The power supply for one of the enclosure within the subsystem reported error condition LOG ES SET BATTERY CHARGER FAILED Attempt to set controller battery charger current and voltage failed LOG ES TEMPERATURE SENSOR ERROR The enclosure temperature sensor has reported an error condition LOG ES UPS CLIENT IS NOT RESPONSIVE Controller enclosure UPS is not responsive Check the USB cable between the UPS and controller LOG ST HEARTBEAT MISMATCH Heartbeat mismatch
20. Figure 86 or SANsurfer for QLogic HBAs Figure 87 Figure 86 HBAnyware Screen File View Port Discovery Batch Help ER Eee 2 3 P 10 00 00 05 1 90 73 A6 mils Port 0 10 00 00 00 09 81 34 46 CO TEST 010 S stk Port 1 10 00 00 00 09 81 34 47 CO TEST D10 Figure 87 SANsurfer FC HBA Manager Screen 3 SANsurfer FC HBA Manager File Host View Settings Wizards Help O if a F B Connect Configure App Events HBA Events Collect Monitor Diags Refresh Ei FCICNA HBA H amp SAN Waming EA Hostname co test 205 1 0 32 30 54arning P HBA Model QLE2462 Warning Brot Loop Down Port 2 Loop Down Parameters i Utilities Hostname co test d06 10 32 30 6 HBA Model GLE2462 HBA Pot 1 Port ID Select Settings section HBA Parameters Example for Linux system with driver loaded example of QLogic ik cd proc scsi qla2xxx ls 12 grep adapter port 1 scsi qla0 adapter port 210000e08b9d6149 bm dell 09 proc scsi qla2xxx grep adapter port 2 scsi qlal adapter port 210100e08bbd6149 lsscsi g grep i ddn 1 0 0 1 disk DDN 2 0 0 1 disk DDN S2A 8500 S2A 8500 HBA Port Selection D QLE2462 Node Name 20 00 00 1B 32 0B AB E0 Port Name 21 00 00 1B 32 06 AB E0 5 31 dev sdc dev sg2 5 31 dev sdg dev sg6 XX QLOGIC v 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 73 96 00259 001 Rev C Presentati
21. HOME ONLY TRUE FALSE which enables disables the home only parameter READ ONLY TRUE FALSE which enables disables the read only parameter 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 68 Presentations 3531 Persistent Reservation Support SCSI 2 Persistent Reservation commands support is included for legacy host file system SFA OS receives either a SCSI 2 RESERVE RELEASE or SCSI 3 PRIN PROUT and responds with the proper type SCSI 2 or SCSI 3 SFA OS will not allow SCSI 2 and SCSI 3 reservation styles to be mixed on the same LUN Attempting to do so will return reservation conflicts Note that a promiscuous host may not be used with persistent reservations In the following command if lt host id gt is ALL you have a promiscuous host APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt VD id gt HOST lt host id gt SFA OS V1 4 0 0 includes the following commands e SCSI 3 Persistent Reserve In PRIN Read Keys 00h MS PRIN Read Reservation 01h MS PRIN Report Capabilities 02h PRIN Read Full Status 03h e SCSI 3 Persistent Reserve Out PROUT Reserve 01h Scope LU_SCOPE 0h Type Write Exclusive Registrants Only 5h MS or Type Exclusive Access 6h MS PROUT Release 02h MS PROUT Clear 03h MS PROUT Preempt 04h MS 3 6 4 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts Apple Mac OS handles Fibre Channels Port Node WWNs uniquely Apple hosts expect node names to be unique
22. Link established and active aS Off Link down On the SFA10000 the RPO and RP1 host ports client channels provide 8 Fibre Channel or 4 InfiniBand host connections on each controller The LED color schemes are described in Figure 13 and Figure 14 On the SFA10000E there are 8 InfiniBand 10Ge host connections available on each controller The IB host port LED color schemes are described in Figure 14 Figure 13 SFA10000 FC Host Port LED Color Scheme RPO RP1 96 00259 001 Rev C BEER Eee BENE 2 3 o 1 1 o 3 2 e e TT wey 2 2 Yellow LED Green LED Red LED Status 8 Gbps 4 Gbps 2 Gbps Off Off Off Power off On On On Power on before firmware init Flashing Flashing Flashing Power on after firmware init Yellow Green an d Red LEDs flashing alternatively Firmware error Off Off On Flashing Online 2 Gbps link I O activity Off On Flashing Off Online 4 Gbps link 1 0 activity On Flashing Off Off Online 8 Gbps link 1 0 activity Flashing Off Flashing Locate Figure 14 SFA10000 10000E IB Host Port LED Color Scheme gt O Description Color Status Physical link Green ON good physical link Flashing indicates a problem with the link Data activ
23. Sub OID Enclosure Index 0 0x80000001 Enclosure OID 0x50000000 Position SES Status O Charge Level 00 Hold Up Time Remaining 17 minutes Enabled AC Failed Present Interface Failed Battery Health Fault Indicator Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator TRUE ALSE TRUE Battery Mfg Date Fri Novl2 12 55 43 2010 Battery Life Remaining 365 days Part number PS5115 RM I500VA Serial number GD371A0853 Firmware version Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 When the controller starts up ES checks the battery manufacture date against the current time and the expected battery life A battery end of life warning will be issued as the battery reaches the specified dates e Ifthe battery life remaining is between 0 and 30 days it will log a warning 000483 2010 11 12 12 53 47 8178400 G 62 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES BATTERY gt END OF LIFE NEAR ES Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 is nearing its end of life and should be replaced within 30 days 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 142 UPS Maintenance e Ifthe battery life remaining is 0 or less it will log an error 000486 2010 11 12 12 54 52 3214473 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG_ES BATTERY END OF LIFE PASSED ES Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 has reached its end of life 0 days ago and should
24. kote di 1 1 FF Fev eC CL ES SF Ee 4 9 3 Set Up a Presentation 4 9 3 1 Create a Host 1 Select Presentation gt Create Host 2 At the Create Host screen Figure 157 enter a host name and specify the Stack and OS attributes Click CREATE HOST Figure 157 Create Host Screen IPRESENTATION CREATE HOST HOST NAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS o Host_0001 o 0x1 LINUX 4 host_0002 o 0x1 WINDOWS 2 host_0003 o 0x1 LINUX 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 131 Presentations 4 9 3 2 Map Host to Discovered Initiators 1 Select Presentation gt Import Initiators 2 At the Import Initiator screen Figure 158 select an initiator and the corresponding host s 3 Click IMPORT INITIATOR Figure 158 Import Initiator Screen DISCOVERED EE CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL ANNE CHANNEL INDEX SELECT PORT NAME NODENAME TYPE Porto Portt Port2 Port3 Port0 Portt Port2 Pon3 Port0 Portt Port2 Port3 Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CO RPO CORPO CORPO CORPO CO RP1 CO RP1 CO RP1 CORP1 C1 RPO C1 RPO C1RPO C1 RPO CURP1 C1 RP1 CARP1 C1 RP1 18 I 0x290300060884 0x2c90300050882 IB NG v v 4 P v 19 IT 0x2c90300060883 0x2c90300060882 IB d Jv P 20 I 0x2c9030007eb8b 0x2c90
25. 0 OID 0x180d0000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Total Capacity 600 GB UUID 600000000000000000000180d0000 a Global Spare Pool 6 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 45 96 00259 001 Rev C Configuring the SFA10000 2712 Present Virtual Disk to External Host SFA10000 Only NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access A Presentation on a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HBA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has all the access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiators Host attributes are OS operating system of which you can select GENERIC WINDOWS LINUX or MAC OS The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of whic
26. 4 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC 2 To change the sparing policy setting use this command SET POOL lt id gt SPARING POLICY AUTOMATIC MANUAL The default setting is automatic which is recommended A rebuild operation can take up to several hours to complete depending on the size of the disk and rate of rebuild Refer to Section 3 10 Performance Management on page 83 for information on how to adjust the rate of rebuild 3 8 3 Manual Disk Replace Rebuild If a storage pool does not have a spare pool assigned to it it becomes necessary to manually add a disk to the storage pool to replace a failed disk To add a disk to a storage pool to replace a failed disk use this command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt id of disk to be added gt TO POOL lt pool id gt SET SPARE The disk will be put into the storage pool as the spare disk and it will be used in the storage pool to replace the failed disk 3 8 4 Manual Fail Rebuild of a Disk The SET PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt FAILED command instructs the system to fail the specified disk When a non SPARE disk is specified and it is failing the disk will not cause a multi channel failure The disk is marked as failed An attempt is made to replace it with a spare disk When a SPARE disk is specified it is released but marked as unhealthy and unavailable CLEAR PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt FAILED changes the specified disk s Failed state to FALSE After clearing a disk use t
27. 5 4 5 4 1 Recovery from Disk Failure Recovery from Disk Failure Automatic Rebuild A single disk failure in any storage pool does not result in data loss The virtual disk s on that storage pool will continue to operate in degraded mode If a spare disk is available and automatic rebuild is enabled the SFA10000 will automatically rebuild the data to a spare disk NOTE System performance will be impacted while recovery is taking place When a disk failure occurs the failure is written to the event log You may monitor the rebuild progress or adjust the rebuild rate to match the user load requirements To display the event log Figure 164 use the SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL LOG command Figure 164 Display Event Log RAID 0 show controller local log 000041 2009 02 04 15 03 17 7295774 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST POOL CHANGE STATE POOL CHANGE POOL 0003 STATE 0005 Disk Replacement 000042 2009 02 04 15 03 17 7295780 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_MEMBER CHANGE STATE MEMBER CHANGE ID 5000cca215c56e02 PDIDI 0145 State Change on Pool 0003 POOL 0003 INDEX 0000 STATE 0003 Rebuild Initiated 000043 2009 02 04 15 03 17 7295810 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_REBUILD START STATE REBUILD START ID 5000cca215c56e02 PDIDI 0145 POOL 0003 INDEX 0000 FENCE 0000000000000000 on Spare Disk To look at the failed disk Figure 165 enter command SHOW UNASSIGNED_POOL FAILED ALL Figure 165 Display
28. 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 20 Cable Connections 2 5 Cable Connections 25 1 Couplet ICL Cabling There are two sets of Inter Controller Link ICL connections between the two controllers 1 Verify that the two InfiniBand cables are attached to the ICL ports on the two controllers as shown in Figure 21 for SFA10000 and Figure 22 for SFA10000E 2 Verify that the four short Ethernet cables are attached to the Ethernet ports on the two controllers as shown in Figure 21 for SFA10000 and Figure 22 for SFA10000E Figure 21 Inter Controller Link Connections on SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 InfiniBand Cable Ethernet Cable Figure 22 Inter Controller Link Connections on SFA10000E Controllers Controller 0 InfiniBand Cable Ethernet Cable
29. DISK Logical ID 0x50001 210006000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID 557000 Revision 0402 Zones 2 c Zoning Configuration Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part number USE13000098RB0O5D Firmware version 04 02 01 lt j Disk Enclosure Firmware Version FPGA version 0008 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 35 Configuring the SFA10000 Verify that both controllers and all the disk enclosures can be seen Figure 38 and contain consistent firmware versions NOTE If an enclosure is not reporting the firmware version or reporting an incorrect version of firmware you must contact DDN Technical Support to have this error corrected before proceeding with the configuration Verify that the disk enclosures are correctly zoned Figure 38 using the table below If the setting is incorrect on a SS6000 enclosure refer to Appendix D for instructions on changing the configuration If the setting is incorrect on a SS7000 or SS2460 enclosure then have a DDN field engineer correct it Zones 1 Systems using ten 60 bay disk enclosures Systems using twenty 60 bay disk enclosures e Systems using five SS2460 disk enclosures Zones 2 Systems using five 60 bay disk enclosures 2 Enter SHOW PHYSICAL DISK Verify that all the disks can be seen and are healthy Figure 39 If the disks are not visible type
30. Figure 115 Subsystem Menu Subsystem Initial Setup Wizard Restart Subsystem Set Background Job Attributes Set Subsystem Attributes Show Background Jobs Show Subsystem Shutdown Subsystem Update Email Settings Show Subsystem To display the current status of the subsystem select Subsystem gt Show Subsystem Figure 116 illustration an example of the Show Subsystem screen It shows the subsystem s attributes The color of the Health Indicator indicates the status of the subsystem Green indicates a healthy condition Orange indicates a faulty condition The alert message below the orange Health Indicator indicates the component that requires attention Figure 116 Show Subsystem Screen Health Indicator NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR SFA10000 Fri Apr 22 2 50 35 2011 ATTENTION REQUIRED Biss Disks A Storage Pools DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 109 4 2 2 4 2 2 1 4 2 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Subsystem Menu Set Subsystem Attributes To change the subsystem s attributes select Subsystem gt Set Subsystem Attributes Figure 117 illustrates the Set Subsystem Attributes screen Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 117 Set Subsystem Attributes Screen SUBSYSTEM SET ATTRIBUTES NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR SFA10000 Fri Apr 22 2 53 47 2011 Subsys
31. LD INIT RUNNING 0x19ab0007 COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 110 4 2 4 4 2 5 96 00259 001 Rev C Subsystem Menu Set Background Jobs Attributes The background job rates can be adjusted to minimize their impact on system performance To set the job priority select Subsystem gt Set Background Jobs The Set Background Jobs screen Figure 119 displays the list of current jobs Select the job and the screen changes accordingly Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save Figure 119 Set Background Job Screen SUBSYSTEM SET BACKGROUND JOB STATE BACKGROUND JOB TYPE STATE TARGET COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED 0x2d830010 POOL VERIFY RUNNING 0x1db50010 70 7 0x2d810011 POOL VERIFY RUNNING 0x1db70011 70 7 0x2e030012 POOL VERIFYONCE RUNNING 0x1db90012 70 14 0x2d810013 POOL VERIFY RUNNING Ox1dbb0013 70 7 0x2e020014 POOLVERIFYONCE RUNNING 0x1dbd0014 70 14 SET BACKGROUND ATTRIBUTES FOR 0x24830010 SET BACKGROUND O Paino Opresum JOB STATE SET BACKGROUND po UPDATE JOB PRIORITY UPDATE Email and Critical Event Notification Setup Emails will be sent automatically as notification of a selected group of warning and error events that have occurred on the SFA10000 The recipient address is user configurable and only one address is permitted per system To set up or change the email address
32. SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISKS 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 65 Spare Pool Management Figure 85 Show Spare Pool Physical Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show spare pool 6 pd Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WN 2 53 HITACHI HUS153030VLS300 SAS 279 15K A410 JHVYKUKC5303 14 SPARE 648 NORM 5000cca00d35c6b0 2 58 HITACHI HUS153030VLS300 SAS 279 15K A410 JHVWU54C5303 14 SPARE 652 NORM 5000cca00d3291 4 Total Physical Disks 2 Total Assigned Disks 2 Total Unassigned Disks 0 Total SAS Disks 2 Total Member State Normal 2 352 Creating a Spare Pool Use these commands to create a spare pool add disk to the spare pool and assign the spare pool to a storage pool e CREATE SPARE POOL ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt spare pool id gt e SET POOL lt pool id gt SPARE POOL lt spare pool id gt where lt pool id gt and lt spare pool id gt are the index names of the storage pool and spare pool respectively 3 5 3 Naming a Spare Pool The SET SPARE_POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt name gt command lets you specify a name to identify the spare pool 3 5 4 Deleting a Spare Pool To delete a disk from the spare pool enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL Ox1800ffff To delete a spare pool enter the command DELETE S PARE POOL lt pool id
33. Success 0x0 RAID 1 application create presentation vd 52 host 305 PRESENTATION 2483 OID 0x256f 09b3 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application show presentation Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller 1 Pres Host Host VD Home Read RP O RP 1 RPO RP1 Index Name Index Index LUN Only Only 0123 0123 0123 0123 02480 co lsl 00304 00049 060 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff 02481 co lsl 00304 00050 061 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff 02482 co test d10 00305 00051 000 OFF R W ffff ffff iffff ffff 02483 co test d10 00305 00052 001 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff Total Presentations 4 NOTE For Windows environments you should let the subsystem specify the LUN ID for a virtual disk RAID 1 application create presentation vd 58 host 306 lun 10 PRESENTATION 2484 OID 0x257009b4 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application create presentation vd 59 host 306 lun 12 PRESENTATION 2485 OID 0x257109b5 creation STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 76 Presentations RAID 1 app show pres Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller 1 Pres Host Host VD Home Read Index Name Index Index LUN Only Only 02480 co lsl 00304 00049 060 OFF R W 02481 co lsl 00304 00050 061 OFF R W 02482 co test d10 00305 00051 000 OFF R W 02483 co test d10 00305 00052
34. Verify Policy DISABLED Assign Policy Device Type SATA Rotation Speed IA Raw Capacity IA SATAssure one Cache Settings ReACT FALSE IO Routing TRUE Mirroring TRUE Read Ahead TRUE Write Back FALSE Initializing TRUE Rebuilding FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write Thru FALSE 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL Oxffffffff 0x00000000 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL 0x28000003 5 NORMAL 120 GB UUID 0x5000cca215c56e47 0x5000cca215c56456 0x5000cca215c54c71 0x5000cca215c5675c 0x5000cca215c56e55 Create Virtual Disks A virtual disk can be created to use all or a part of a storage pool To create a virtual disk use the CREATE VIRTUAL_DISK command 1 Atthe CLUI prompt type CREATE VIRTUAL_DISK POOL lt pool id gt CAPACITY lt capacity gt Configuring the SFA10000 where lt pool id gt is the storage pool to be used by this virtual disk lt capacity gt is the capacity of the virtual disk in GiB or type max to use all available capacity Figure 50 A message is displayed to indicate whether the virtual disk creation was successful DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 42 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 50 CREATE VIRTUAL DISKS Example Screen RAID 0 create virtual_disk pool 0 capacity 16 VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 create virtual disk capacity 32 pool 0 VIRTUAL DISK 1 OID 0x89bb
35. bezel Figure 186 If the switches are hidden by a Mylar switch cover remove the cover with a small pair of tweezers If the switches are still not visible remove the grey bezel It is attached to the chassis with 32 small screws 18 on the front and 14 on the bottom Figure 186 Zoning Configuration Piano Switches Behind Bezel Piano Switches 4 Verify that the piano switches are correctly set For system with 5 disk enclosures zoning configuration 1 the left most piano switch should be up and the rest down This divides the disk slots into two logical enclosures For system with 10 or 20 disk enclosures zoning configuration 0 all the piano switches should be down This connects all disk slots into one logical enclosure If a change is needed remove the Mylar switch cover with a small pair of tweezers and then use a dental tool to move the switches The tweezers and dental tool can be 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 161 96 00259 001 Rev C S6000 Zoning Configuration Procedure inserted through the grey bezel air holes If changing the switches with a dental tool proves to be too difficult then the grey bezel can be removed Replace the front bezel and the grey bezel if previously removed Push the enclosure back into the rack Repeat the above steps on all disk enclosures DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 162 E Rack Insta
36. cece e ccc eee ener een tent nn enn enes 62 3 3 6 Naming a Storage Pool cece cece cece eee nent eee e nen een enes 62 33 7 Deleting a Storage Pool 2 cece cece cece ener e rece DERE DELES 62 338 Locat ia Storage Pool gisiiviisianiidiveostav EREILI eee 62 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xvii 96 00259 001 Rev C Table of Contents 3 4 Virtual Disk Management cc cceeee ee eee ence eee eet eeeeeteeeeeneenaees 63 3 4 1 Display Virtual Disk Information 02 cece eee eee e eect ene ene ences 63 342 Creating a Virtual Disks cc cecivessadeaevendssdseaesedaseda cs ene rake gs 64 343 N minga Virtual Disk ceisicctscidsdyiaciect ies viaetveddeneiaehwisged eines 64 344 Deleting a Virtual Disk 0 0c cece cee cn ence nen cent en enn ene 64 3 4 5 Presentation to Hosts not applicable on SFA1OQ00E 0 00 ee 64 3 5 Spare Pool Management isc c cece se EDER ER ELERS ERE 65 3 5 1 Display Spare Pool Information cece cece cece eee nen e nent ences 65 3 5 2 Creating aSpare Pool eee cece cece teen nett ene EEN RERA 66 35 3 Naming aSpare Pool chisct desietieactd Ges kawenee bes EEEE 66 3 54 Deleting a Spare Pool cece cee cece ence nen ene ne eben tenes 66 30 PreS ntatlons 34 ciceedvc asians nies enig dae EAEE RE EA ene ak de 67 3 6 1 Discovered Initiator Commands 0 cece cee cece eee eee ee
37. ha DO NOT USE Ethernet ICL Activity Ethernet ICL Activity NOTE Do NOT use the Power button under normal operation since doing so may cause data loss If you need to power down the controller issue the SHUTDOWN command via CLUI or GUI first then use the UPS s Power button to turn off power to the controller Refer to Section 3 9 2 System Shutdown for more information Table 1 Controller Status LED Indicators Description Color Status Power Green ON power is applied to controller enclosure OFF no power is applied to controller enclosure Locate Blue Flashing at a 2 second interval receiving Locate Enclosure command OFF NOT receiving Locate Enclosure command Enclosure Amber ON a fan failure power supply failure or over temperature condition Fault occurred A service action is required OFF no detectable faults HDD Green Flashes indicates HDD activity OFF no HDD activity Ethernet ICL Green Flashes indicates the corresponding ICL link is up and both controllers are running OFF no ICL activity Network Green ON good connection is established on the corresponding Ethernet port Activity Flashes indicates activity 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 7 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 2 Fan Module Each controller is equipped with four fan modules Figure 7 These fan modules provide redundant
38. the re discovered Port Node WWN will be assigned a new host_index number This is inconsequential after a specific Port Node WWN is directly associated with a specific host that is done in a subsequent step Example of discovered initiators RAIDS app show discovered initiator Initiator Identifier Controller 0 Controller 1 Index Type ID node port RPO RP1l RP 0 RP 1 00003 FC 0x010600 0x20000000c9813cc9 0x20000000c9813cc9 3 00005 FC 0x010800 0x20000000c9813cc8 0x20000000c9813cc8 0 00006 2 FC FC 00007 FC 0x010a00 0x20000000c9813a46 0x20000000c9813a46 00011 FC 0x010300 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2000001b32827e95 00012 FC 0x010200 0x2000001b32a27e95 0x2000001b32a27e95 Total FC Initiators 6 0x010900 0x20000000c9813a47 0x20000000c9813a47 In order to provide an association between a host and a virtual disk you must identify the FC connection its Node Port WWN name to the host object You may use the following techniques e Utilize the physical sticker tag information on the HBA 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 72 Presentations e Connect a single host at a time and all its FC connections to the subsystem to the subsystem direct connect or via a switch identify their WWNs as a discovered initiator then a proceed to plug in subsequent hosts noting their WWNs e Utilize a host based FC Adapter utility such as HBAnyware for Emulex HBAs
39. x 100 5 1846 mm x 1016 mm x 2553 mm Figure 17 Each crate includes ramp that can be used to remove the rack from the crate pallet jack must be used to move the crate from the delivery vehicle to a flat location that is at least 5 x 12 1 52 m x 3 66 m where the ramp can be installed and the rack can be rolled out of the crate Due to the weight of the crate it is essential that either the delivery vehicle is equipped with a lift gate or the destination has a loading dock with a lift Once a rack has been removed from the crate it can be rolled to its destination Racks are either 42U or 45U The 42U racks are 81 75 2077 mm tall and the 45U racks are 87 2210 mm tall Both type of racks are 28 712 mm wide and 45 75 1162 mm deep including the front and rear doors Note that the physical disk modules are shipped separately from the disk enclosures The disk modules are packaged in separate boxes that are strapped to pallets These pallets can be moved to the installation site using a pallet jack To Do List e Plan the unpacking location where the delivery vehicle will deliver the crate e Verify that the route to the installation site does not involve any steps e Verify that any elevator that is part of the route has sufficient door height and load capacity e Verify that the size of all the doorways along the delivery route is big enough for the pallet jack with the crate to pass through Verify that th
40. 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 79 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 2 96 00259 001 Rev C Disk Rebuild Disk Rebuild The SFA10000 s automatic disk failure recovery procedures ensure that absolute data integrity is maintained while operating in degraded mode Full and Partial Rebuilds Both full and partial fractional rebuilds are supported in SFA10000 Rebuilds are done at the storage pool level not the virtual disk level Partial rebuilds will reduce the time to return the storage pool to full redundancy and can be controlled by adjustable time limit for each storage pool Permitted time limits are 0 in which case partial rebuild is off to 240 minutes The timer will begin when a disk in the storage pool is declared missing If the disk reappears prior to the expiration of the timer a fractional rebuild will be done Otherwise the disk will be declared failed replaced by a spare and a full rebuild will begin to return the storage pool to full redundancy The default partial rebuild timer Disk Timeout setting is 10 minutes Under heavy write workloads it is possible that the number of stripes that need to be rebuilt will exceed the system s internal limits prior to the timer expiration When this happens a full rebuild will be started automatically instead of waiting for the partial rebuild timeout Use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the current Disk Timeout setting
41. 0X1C987C765CD3B2B Ne 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 99 312 2 3 12 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Event Log Structure Figure 105 below illustrates the structure of an event log The severity levels include 0 Informational 1 Warning 2 Error 3 Fatal Some additional parameters are ES Enclosure WWN Slot number for example 50001ff101ed0000 60 IOC SAS SATA controller number IOCO for example WWN 5000cca216ed8430 RC Reason Code 04 Device Not Responding PHY Expander PHY device is attached too for example PHY 08 ASCQ ASC ASCQ SCSI sense data Figure 105 Event Log Structure The System Logs Severity Event D Time RAID Sequence ate Stamp Group Type Processor Event Number Name 014547 2009 08 31 12 30 08 1953906 G 62 5 0 r 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE STATE POOL MEMBER CHANGE INDEX 00000000 ID 0x5000cca20def4516 PDIDI 0085 MEMBER INDEX 0000 STATE REBUILD Event Message Component and Parameters Name SFA OS Terms in the Log STATE Implements all policy implements the metadata store handles all dual controller issues and controls all other modules ES Enclosure Services Monitors all disk enclosures and its local controller enclosure AMPD and MPI Implements the back end SAS SATA I O controller drivers for access and discovery of Physical
42. 0x25ab008d SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 50 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGV13VN 1 r 0x25520094 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 56 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGRNTMS INDEX SELECT POOL NAME POOL TYPE DRIVE TYPES ENCLOSURE LIST SMALLEST DRIVE ASSIGN POLICY DRIVE TYPE SPEED GB SIZE GB 19 c pool19 STORAGE SATASATASATA SATA SATA 1111111 1863 SATA 7200 RPM 1863 22 G ORDE SPARE SATA SATA SATA 111 1863 NANANA cance 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 116 Unassigned Pool 4 5 Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool 4 5 1 Show Unassigned Pool Select Pools gt Show Unassigned Pool Figure 132 Figure 132 Pools Menu Pools Clear Fault Create Spare Pool Create Storage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delete Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool Verify Pools At the Show Unassigned Pool screen Figure 133 click on Total Members to display the list of disks in this pool Figure 133 Show Unassigned Pool Screen UNASSIGNED POOL SHOW UNASSIGNE
43. 161 disk failure recovery 139 disk map SFA10000E 160 disk module install 20 157 161 163 disk timeout 80 E email notification 102 Ethernet connection 101 event log 136 display 99 structure 100 terms 100 F failure disk fixing 139 fan controller 148 power supply controller 147 fan controller 8 controller replace 148 features system 3 field replaceable unit list of 171 firmware current version 89 update 88 update controller 89 update disk enclosure 92 update physical disk 96 floor loading 17 fractional rebuild 80 FRU controller 171 SS2460 172 SS6000 171 SS7000 172 full rebuild 80 Index G NTP set 78 110 GUI 107 P ES packing list 19 partial rebuild 80 liost connect contTolNer 40 29 persistent reservation SCSI 69 host presentation to 46 67 physical location disk 56 1 storage pool 62 ICL 21 unassigned pool 56 import discovered initiator 70 pool initialization 60 spare create 44 66 failed 60 spare display 65 storage create 40 unassigned 54 installation 14 installation planning 15 inter controller link 21 power Cycle diskdrive 141 internal disk replace controller power requirement 17 149 power supply controller 8 replace controller 147 IO ports controller 10 IP address set controller 101 T O module replace 150 presentation 46 67 MacOS 69 J masking 49 priority job priority set 85 job set 85 build set 86 L re 5 LED R controller 7 controller IO p
44. 4 0 User Guide xix Chapter 5 Support 96 00259 001 Rev C Table of Contents 44 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool 0 cece cece cece eect eee e nen eeeenes 116 444 Assign Diskto Pools erini eon enini ancini cece ence ene e ee en ene eneeees 116 45 Unassigned POO sescenti serne EREE EEE bien 117 4 5 1 Show Unassigned Pool 0 cece eee eee e cence eee e ene teen ennen 117 45 2 Locate Unassigned Pool cece cece cece e nent eee ennen ennen 118 46 Storage POO Linser banene urtene Gemma eves 119 46 1 Show List of Storage Pools anuvnnvnnanennennennanenuennanuanennene 119 46 2 Create aStorage Pool cece cece KEE ER 120 46 3 Configure Storage Pool Attributes 0 eee cece cece eee eee ees 121 464 Locate Storage Pools cece eee cece eee nen ene ee eee eneeneaes 122 46 5 Delete a Storage Pool ieee cece cece een eee ee ene eneeneaes 122 AT Virtual Disks MENU susrsssaessa te nekian EEE EEEE A AE 123 4 7 1 Show List of Virtual Disks orenenuananenenennanenerenennanenenenenenr 123 47 2 Create a Virtual Disk 0 ccc ccc cece cece een ee ene ence ence eenes 124 47 3 Configure Virtual Disk Attributes 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee e eee eee e nes 124 4 7 4 Delete a Virtual Disk asanananuananenenennenenenenennanenenenenenner 125 AS Sp drePoolsuLavssrs dsasseaaeae ee 126 4 8 1 Show Spare Pools ranannanenananenenennenenenenennenenenennenenener 126 48 2 Locate a Spar
45. Configuring the SFA10000 2 7 Configuring the SFA10000 This section provides information on configuring your SFA10000 NOTE The configuration examples provided here represent only a general guideline These examples should not be used directly to configure your particular SFA10000 The CLUI Command Line User Interface commands used in these examples are fully documented in Chapter 3 however exact commands may change depending on your firmware version To access the most up to date commands use the CLUI s online HELP feature The CLUI commands are independent of case Most of the keywords can be abbreviated and most of the punctuations are optional For example SHOW CON LO ALL is adequate for SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL ATTRIBUTES 2 7 1 Planning Your Setup and Configuration Before proceeding to configure the storage settings for the SFA10000 it is necessary to understand the basic organization of the system The SFA10000 uses storage pools and virtual disks to configure disk storage for use by the hosts A storage pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group is a collection of 2 to 10 physical disks ideally of the same capacity and type In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recovery in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a storage pool In
46. Failed Disk RAID 0 show unassigned pool failed all OID 0x20a7003f Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 704512 MBs 0x56000000 blocks Raw Capacity 715404 MBs 0x575466f0 blocks Block Size 512 f Enabled Disk Ch 0x27 0x22 t Physical Location C Disk Slot 1 42 Enclosure 1 Disk Slot 42 Vendor ID Hitachi Product ID Hitachi HUA721075KLA330 Product Revision GK80ABOA Serial Number GTF200P8GBVPXF C Health State FAILED Rotation Speed 7200 RPM Device Type SATA Member State UNASSIGNED Spare FALSE Failed TRUE UUID 0x5000cca215c564560 To monitor the rebuild progress Figure 166 enter command SHOW JOB ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 166 Display Rebuild Progress RAID 0 show job all_attributes OID 0x2b050003 Target 0x19b40003 Type REBUILD Status RUNNING Priority 80 Fraction Complete 12 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 139 Recovery from Disk Failure To show the storage pool information Figure 167 enter command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Once the rebuild is complete the status of storage pool will return to NORMAL Figure 167 Display Storage Pool Information RAID 0 show pool 3 all_attributes OID 0x19b40003 Type STORAGE Name raid 5 set Chunk Size 64KB 0x80 blocks Block Size 0x200 RAID Type RAIDS Free Raid5 Capacity 2752512 MBs Total Capacity 3
47. Figure 123 Set Controller Attributes Screen SET CONTROLLER ATTRIBUTES UP TIME RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE mete me Enst TAR CRASHDUMP NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE days PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION SYNC hh mm REQUIRED 0 A 1 3 1 2 6962 0000 RUNNING REMOTE ee Pd NONE tt 1 B 13 1 2 6962 0000 RUNNING LOCAL go om rd g NONE i 7 38 controller SET CONTROLLER ATTRIBUTES Set attributes for A controller Log disk Enabled Disabled UPDATE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 113 4 3 3 4 3 4 96 00259 001 Rev C Controllers Menu Update Controller Firmware You can update the controller firmware using the Update Firmware function After you have obtained the new firmware files select Controllers gt Update Firmware At the Update Firmware screen Figure 124 locate the firmware file and click UPDATE FIRMWARE Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update Also refer to Section 3 11 2 Controller Firmware Update Procedure on page 89 for detailed instructions Figure 124 Update Controller Firmware Screen CONTROLLERS UPDATE FIRMWARE UP TIME RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOCAUREMOTE PRIMARY days CRASHDUMP TER NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE ey PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION syng i REQUIRED y 0 da
48. IP PORT 25 FROM 3 doe ddn com TO jdoe ddn com SUBJECT DDN SFA10000 Event Notification ui set email ip address 192 168 0 10 0 ui set email subject DDN SFA10000 Event Notification 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 102 31252 31353 96 00259 001 Rev C Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP Setup The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP monitors network attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention In Version 1 1 SNMP traps have been implemented to monitor critical and warning events A management information base MIB has also been created to be used to provide inquiry objects and events to the user s monitoring application The provided SNMP traps expose management data on the managed system in the areas of temperature senor fans power supplies pools and physical disks as well as a variety of real time critical and error events Each controller has an SNMP_AGENT When changing the SNMP settings you must set the changes on each controller separately To set the SNMP trap agent on a controller enter the command Figure 111 UI SET SNMP IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt COMMUNITY lt name gt To show all the SNMP trap agent attributes use UI SHOW SNMP command Figure 111 Figure 111 SNMP Configuration Example Screen RAID 0 ui set snmp ip_address 192 168 0 10 SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0
49. Ib ft 1600 Ib 8 9ft Accounting for the minimum isle space the load is 98 Ib ft To Do List e Verify with the building structural engineer that the floor structure is sufficient to hold the weight of the SFA10000 racks configured as planned in Section 2 2 2 Rack Location Air Flow and Access 2 2 4 Cooling Supply Planning Each SFA10000 45U rack can draw up to 14 5 KW and generate 50 KBTU hour of heat Each SFA10000 42U racks can draw over 8 KW and 25 KBTU hour of heat Sufficient air conditioning must be provided to cool this heat load to a nominal room temperature of 25 C DDN will provide an estimate of power and heat for each rack on request To Do List e Verify that the rack locations will have sufficient cooling 22 5 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification Each SFA10000 rack has four to eight power cords that are designed to connect to 208 VAC or 280 VAC DDN will provide a count of the power cords for each rack on request Each AC power cable has a NEMA L6 30P connector Figure 20 Before the SFA10000 racks can be installed sufficient L6 30R receptacles for these AC power cables must be installed by an electrician Each L6 30R receptacle should be connected to a 30 Amp circuit breaker Figure 20 L6 30R Wiring Diagram 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 17 Site Preparation These power cords can either be connected to two separate AC power sources fo
50. License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such
51. RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication A single RAID 1 storage pool can be configured with 2 disks A single RAID 5 storage pool can be configured using 5 or 9 disks A single RAID 6 storage pool can be configured using 6 or 10 disks NOTE It is NOT recommended to configure storage pools with physical disks of different capacity as the SFA10000 will use the lower capacity for all disks and space will be wasted A virtual disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host Virtual disks allocate space in 8 GiB increments For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a virtual disk of 10 GiB The disks in the system are categorized into one of the following pools e Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool e Storage Pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group A collection of 2 to 10 disks ideally of the same capacity and type e Spare Pool This type of pool contains disk s that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 34 dd 27 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Configuring the SFA10000 Serial Interface Configuration 1 On the PC that is connected to the controller load a serial console program such as
52. Select Subsystem gt Update Email Settings The upper portion of the Update Email Settings screen Figure 120 will display the current settings if any Figure 120 Update Email Settings Screen CONTROLLERS UPDATE EMAIL SETTINGS E mail Agent Attributes IP ADDRESS 192 168 11 137 IP PORT 23 UPDATE EMAIL SETTINGS Update IP Address 192 16811137 Update IP Port BB Update From SFA10K ddn com Update To service dan com DDN SFA10K Event Notification UPDATE Update Subject e In the Update IP Address field enter the IP address of the SMTP server to which the SFA10000 will send email notifications e Inthe Update IP Port field enter the IP port of the SMTP server to which the SFA10000 will send email notifications DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 111 Subsystem Menu e Inthe Update From field maximum field size 512 enter an identification string such as the name of the controller This is a string which will be included on the From line of the email notification message sent by the agent e Inthe Update To field maximum field size 512 enter an Internet Mail Format RFC2822 email address to which SFA10000 will send email notifications e Inthe Update Subject field maximum field size 512 enter a string to be included on the subject line of the email notification sent by the email agent Click UPDATE to save the changes The tables liste
53. Single Controller WB ENABLED Fri Apr 22 6 26 39 2011 If you are not using NTP you can set the time of both controllers using the SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command However once the time is set the time on the two controllers is free to drift independent of the other controller To change the date and time to March 1 2011 2 15 pm for example type SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME 2011 3 1 14 15 NOTE If NTP mode is enabled the SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command will fail with a status of Setting date time while in NTP mode ZTE Configure Network Interface Settings The SFA10000 can be configured and administered either via serial connection using the supplied serial cable or via Ethernet connection using SSH However in order to use the SSH connection it is first necessary to configure the network settings on each controller This can only be done using the serial interface as described below 1 Enter the command UI SET NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL 0 IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt IP MASK lt netmask gt IP GATEWAY lt gateway gt where lt ip address gt is an address appropriate to the local network The netmask and gateway values can also be entered Figure 44 Figure 44 Set Network Interface Example RAID 0 ui set network interface local 0 ip address 192 168 0 10 ip mask 255 255 255 0 ip gateway 192 168 0 1 NETWORK INTERFACE 0 set with STATUS Success 0x0 O 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks
54. USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide ix Important Information END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyrigh
55. a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HBA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has all the access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiators Host attributes are OS operating system of which you can select GENERIC WINDOWS LINUX or MAC_OS The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of which you can select either MAC_OS or STANDARD When MAC OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack A Stack is the input side of the subsystem In the case of the SFA10000 the stack is defined as the Fibre Channel interface In future versions of the product different interface stacks may exist Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to
56. a minute For example RAID 0 update pd file WD2002FYPS 05D07 DDN A request has been made to update physical disk firmware No attempt will be made to preserve redundancy if the physical disk resides in a pool If the update to the physical disk encounters catastrophic failure then this may result in lost data if the pool loses all of its redundancy It is recommended that a backup is done prior to this operation Are you sure you want to update physical disk firmware Yes PHYSICAL DISK 65535 OID Oxffffffff firmware update started STATUS An asynchronous command has been started 0x3000068 The controller has initiated the download operation which may take up to several minutes Check the progress and status of the download operation with SHOW PD n UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS Additional information may be found in the event log 4 To monitor the upgrade progress enter command SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd update firmware progress Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Revision Serial Number Pool Idx WWN Complete Status HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVWMZNC5301 UNAS 271 50014ee2032d2555 5 In Progress 6 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 J4V1YYAA5301 UNAS 272 50014ee2032d196c 7 8 In Progress HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 FVWL5YC5301 UNAS 274 50014ee2032ca9a9 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS 269 50014
57. across all subsystem ports All other OS s expect the FC node names to be the same across all subsystem ports Because of this uniqueness VD presentations must be uniquely set up when an Apple Mac presentation is being made from a SFA10000 subsystem NOTE You MUST create the host object with OSTYPE MAC for Mac hosts You must identify at least one controller port channel preferably one controller port for each SFA10000 controller on the storage subsystem as operating in the Mac mode APPLICATION SET CHANNEL 0 1 2 3 MODE MAC NOTE Setting changing the mode of a channel will require a shutdown restart of the controller for the change to actually take place If a Mac presentation is being made from the subsystem NO other VD from this subsystem should be presented to ALL hosts In a SAN and or MIXED OS environment of Mac and other operating systems create the presentations as follows APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt vd id gt HOST lt host_index gt ENABLE NONE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 69 Presentations This will disable channels through which to make a presentation Then you will next enable the specific channels through which you wish to make the presentation APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 0 1 2 3 To enable two channels it is necessary to enter two separate commands In the current implementation you
58. amp Shipping Instructions 178 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xxi Chapter 1 Introduction 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Welcome to the DataDirect Networks SFA10000 User Guide 1 1 1 DataDirect Networks Storage Fusion Architecture SFA DDN s Storage Fusion Architecture provides the foundation for balanced high performance storage system Using highly parallelized storage processing technology SFA delivers unprecedented IOPS and massive throughput at the same time Combined with Enterprise level data protection and leading scalability density and energy efficiency SFA is the storage technology of choice for the most extreme storage infrastructure projects The SFA10000 employs RAID data integrity and data management software written from the ground up to take advantage of multi core processors and modern bus architectures Its highly threaded architecture allows performance to linearly scale with advances in underlying hardware This same architecture allows the SFA10000 to perform in the extreme range of both throughput and IOPS Designed to house the most scalable unstructured file data the system supports up to 1200 disks of raw storage while enabling a combination of SAS SATA or SSD disks 1 1 2 Product Variations Various configurations Figure
59. and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modificat
60. circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide v Important Information non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this Licen
61. cooling system for the unit If one module fails the other three will maintain sufficient cooling for the enclosure The faulty module will still be providing proper air flow for the enclosure so do not remove it until a new module is available for replacement Figure 7 Controller Fan Module 1 2 3 Power Supply Module Each controller includes two power supply modules Figure 8 These modules are redundant and hot swappable If one module fails the other module will maintain sufficient power to the enclosure The faulty module will still be providing proper air flow for the enclosure so do not remove it until a new module is available for replacement The LED mounted on the module indicates the status of the power supply It is green when the module is operating normally and turns off when a fault occurs Figure 8 Controller Power Supply Module Thumbscrew Status LED i 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 8 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 4 Internal Disk Modules The SFA10000 controller includes three internal hard disks Disk A and Disk B are mirrored system disks to run the controller The information on these 2 disks includes the Linux OS the SFA OS software the event log and controller specific configuration not storage configuration Disk C is used for a large trace log Each disk module comprises a single low profile 1 0 inch high 3 5
62. disk and lt pool id gt is the OID of the storage pool that had the failed disk 5 4 4 Manual Rebuild You may manually replace a failed disk using the REPLACE command REPLACE PHYSICAL DISK lt id gt NEW_DISK lt new disk id gt A Replace operation is used to replace a failed disk with a healthy spare disk The operation can take several hours to complete depending on the size of the disk and speed of the replace operation The rate of rebuild can be adjusted see Section 3 11 Firmware Update Management on page 88 for more information 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 140 Recovery from Disk Failure 5 4 5 Power Cycling Disk Drives SATA disks can get wedged and stop working When this occurs power cycling may bring the disk back on line To power cycle a disk enter the CLUI command SET SLOT lt enclosure id gt lt slot id gt POWER NOTE Disk power cycling requires an interposer that supports power cycling Whether a disk can be power cycled depends on the following factors e Enclosure Enclosure type Enclosure firmware version e Interposer Multiplexor Interposer type Interposer hardware version Table 6 shows the current enclosures and interposers along with whether they can be power cycled or not Table 6 Disk Slot Power Cycle Support Enclosure Interposer Power Cycle Supported S56000 SAS to SAS Yes SATA Mult
63. displayed on the left and controller 1 s results are displayed on the right In Figure 92 if VD 102 is mastered by controller 0 all of the I O is passing through controller 1 thus doing wrong side I O Figure 92 Show Virtual Disk Counters Example Screen RAID 0 show vd counters Virtual disk Counters Elapsed time 12 181 seconds Idx IOs sec KiB sec KiB IO Fwd IO s Fwd KiB s IOs sec KiB sec KiB IO Fwd IO s Fwd KiB s 102 0 0 0 0 0 6580 109243 68 0 0 103 0 0 0 0 0 7005 116304 68 0 0 104 0 0 0 0 0 5158 186392 148 0 0 105 0 0 0 0 0 2825 102083 148 0 0 106 0 0 0 0 0 3481 210768 248 0 0 107 0 0 0 0 0 3641 220500 248 0 0 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 109 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 114 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 115 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 117 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 118 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 119 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 84 Performance Management 3 10 4 Background Job Priority Initialization and rebuild operations are background processes and their rates can be adjusted to minimize their impact on system performance To display the list of current jobs enter command SHOW JOB The type of job and percentage of completion are displayed Figure 93 Figure 93 Show Job Example Screen 1 FOI III II ICI ICI kk ak Background Jobs FO E HE AE E E FE R
64. gt 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 66 Presentations 3 6 Presentations NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable A Presentation on a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HCA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has all the access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiators Host attributes are OS operating system of which you can select GENERIC WINDOWS LINUX or MAC_OS The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host OSTYPE Standard uses current settings and Custom allows for requests for different adjustments from OEMs e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of which you can select either MAC_OS or STANDARD When MAC_OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack A Stack is the inp
65. home RP index 0 Preferred home Controller id 0x1 08029d0000 xl 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 123 4 7 2 4 7 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Virtual Disks Menu Create a Virtual Disk To create a virtual disk select Virtual Disks gt Create Virtual Disk At the Create Virtual Disk screen Figure 144 select the storage pool s to be used Then enter the capacity in GB Click CREATE VIRTUAL DISK to create the virtual disk Figure 144 Create Virtual Disk Screen VIRTUAL DISK CREATE VIRTUAL DISK FREE TOTAL MAXVD DISK WRITE READ INDEX SELECT Virke EE RAID STATE RAID CAP RAWCAP size GB TIMEOUT SATAssure Hilt MA BACK MIRRORED AHEAD GB GB Min CACHE CACHE 0 pool 0 128 RAID6 21784 27360 21784 10 10 3 i af 1 r pool 1 256 RAIDS 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 Jf 2 B pool 2 64 RAID6 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 S eg f 3 Oo pool 3 32 RAIDS 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 p Jf af 4 r pool 4 256 RAID6 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 af ao N 5 Oo pool 5 32 RAID6 1440 2400 1440 10 DIF 5 3 pr 6 r pool 6 128 RAID6 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 f f zl Select capacity MAX The Virtual Disk capacity will be rounded up to an 8GB boundary NOTE If MAX is typed then the maximum free capacity available in each pool will be used CREATE VIRTUAL DISK Configure Virtual Disk Attributes To change a virtual disk s attributes select Virtual Disk
66. icc lt ssdsaaacee coeesdeadeueeed ys tsaanemenreusdeas 83 3107 Cache COnereney vic vaa con eveds ae EA SAEN ESAE 83 3 10 1 1 Cache Protection cece cece eee ES EDER REE ERR ES 83 3 10 2 Single Controller Write Back Cache Policy eee ee eee ee eee ee es 83 3103 Right SIde VO sakna pe arkade 84 3 10 4 Background Job Priority cece cece eee e nen eee renere 85 3 10 4 1 Pause Resume a JOb 0c cece cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeenees 86 3 10 5 Rebuild Policy Priority cece eee titti cece ene ene EANES e anes 86 3 11 Firmware Update Management cece cence cece eee eeneeteeeeeneenaees 88 3 11 1 Displaying Current Firmware Version 0 cece cece eee e eee ee ence 89 3 11 2 Controller Firmware Update Procedure 0 cece cece eee e eee e ee eeee 89 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xviii Chapter 4 GUI Management Agent 96 00259 001 Rev C Table of Contents 3 11 2 1 Linux Environment Firmware Update from the Network 90 3 11 2 2 Windows Environment Firmware Update from the Network 90 3 11 3 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure ece eee eee eee eee 92 3 11 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions cccc ccc cece cece cece cece eee eeenees 92 3 11 3 2 Linux Environment Firmware Upload ccc ceee cece cece eee eees 93 3 11 3 3 Windows Environment Firmware Upload
67. is fully inserted Tighten the thumbscrew to secure it 6 Connect the power cord 7 Verify that the Status LED is green indicating that the module is operating normally 8 Verify that the Enclosure Fault LED on the front panel is no longer amber 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 147 Controller Component Failures 562 Replacing a Fan Module If there is any problem with the fan module the Enclosure Fault LED on the front panel will turn amber You can determine if a fan has failed using the CLUI command SHOW FAN The position of the failed fan should match the label FAN1 FAN2 FANS or FAN4 on the front of the controller If a fan has failed you must replace it Once you remove it you must replace it within 5 minutes to prevent the system from over heating NOTE Obtain a replacement module of the same type before removing any faulty module Follow these steps to replace a fan module NOTE Attempting to replace more than one fan simultaneously will cause the controller to fail 1 Identify the failed fan 2 Loosen the module s thumbscrew Figure 175 3 Slide the module out of the bay Figure 175 Controller Fan Removal 4 Slide the new module into the bay making sure that it is fully inserted 5 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure it 6 Verify that the Enclosure Fault LED is no longer amber indicating that the new module is operatin
68. meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 3M 3 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 4M 4 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 5M 5 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure 96 00259 001 Rev C S56000 Disk Enclosure FRU FRU Part Numbers FRU Part Number Unit per Description Enclosure CBL MSMS 6M 6 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure 601 BLANK Empty slot filler for enclosure SS7000 Disk Enclosure FRU Unit per FRU Part Number Description Enclosure FRU SS7K RK 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU SS7K CMA 1 Cable management arms FRU SS7K PS 2 1865 Watt Power supply module FRU SS7K IO 2 1 0 module FRU SS7K KIT Spares kit includes 1 x 1865W power supply module and 1 x I O module KIT CBL10KSS Mini SAS cable kit to connect an SFA10000 singlet or a SFA10000E couplet to 5 x 60 bay enclosures Also used to connect SFA10000 couplet to 5 x 24 bay enclosures includes 2 x 2 meter cables and 18 x 3 meter cables CBL MSMS XM Cable kit includes various length of mSAS mSAS cables to connect SFA10000 singlet to 60 bay enclosures SS7K BLANK Empty slot filler enclosure 52460 Disk Enclosure FRU Unit per FRU Part Number Enclosure Description FRU 2460 RLK 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU 2460 PSU 2 Power supply module FRU 2460 IOM 2 I O module KIT CBL10KSS Min
69. of Rack A A Front of Rack A Disk Enclosure 4 Disk Enclosure 9 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack Disk Enclosure 5 Disk Enclosure 10 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack A 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 160 D S S6000 Zoning Configuration Procedure This appendix provides information on how to change the zoning configuration on an SS6000 enclosure The disk enclosures must be zoned correctly The zoning configuration is determined by the piano switches located behind the front bezel of the enclosure Follow these steps to verify the zoning configuration on each disk enclosure 1 Slide the enclosure out from the rack by squeezing the tabs on both rack slides Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound 2 Remove the front bezel by removing the four screws Figure 185 Figure 185 Removing S56000 Front Bezel 3 Once the front bezel is removed it is possible to see the piano switches through the grey
70. operation InfiniBand or 10G Ethernet Connectivity on SFA10000E The SFA10000E provides up to 16 individual IB or10Ge ports for host access to the Virtual Machines Each port can be configured to run as either InfiniBand QDR or 10G Ethernet 10G Ethernet connectivity requires special cabling that can be purchased separately from DDN See your sales contact for more details Active Active Operation with Cache Coherency and Failover SFA implements an active active host presentation model with routing based data access and full cache coherency Data Protection The SFA RAID stack provides protection against single physical disk failures with RAID 1 or RAID 5 data protection as well as double physical disk failures through the use of high speed RAID 6 protection Configurable RAID Group Sizes 5 or 9 disks RAID 5 group 6 or 10 disks RAID 6 group 2 disks RAID 1 group This feature allows you to configure the system with the desired RAID and redundancy levels based on the importance of your data Each RAID group is configured independently and any valid combination for the number of disks in the array is supported SAS SATA SSD storage pool Intermixing high performance SSD and SAS disks with high capacity SATA disks provides the flexibility to migrate disk technology along with varying application needs The SFA10000 s enclosure level disk intermixing and exceptional per disk performance reduces the number of disks needed to meet growing pe
71. system when the systems were powered down and then rebooted If the disks were installed in the system while running then this should not be an issue A list of found configurations will be listed Use the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR STATE ID lt id gt command to use the specified ID s configuration MIR_DUAL_NO_AGREE The two connected controllers do not agree on the ID of the configuration This may occur if one controller saw a subset of the disks and the other controller saw a different subset of disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup MIR_CONFIG_MISMATCH The configuration version of this firmware does not match the configuration version of that on media To proceed either reload the previous version of firmware and do a backup then upgrade or delete your configuration to continue Use CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION to create an empty configuration NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed MIR_NO_LOAD_CONFIG A configuration could not be loaded from the backend disks Fix the condition that prevents this controller from loading a configuration from the backend disks or use CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR_STATE to create an empty configuration Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 138
72. teen eee e eee e eee e eee rr nn eens xii International Standards 0 c cece cece cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e eee ee eben nee e eee eees xii Potential for Radio Frequency Interference ee eeeeee eee eee ne eee e eee eeennees xii European Regulations 0 cc ccee cece eee eee eee ENa A ENRE E SEE ENE xiii Canadian Regulations gar iciniinesscaesg Seam ERE Saas kake peewee seder ees xiii Safe Handling vasse ark re rea rekke reads xiii SATORY ATE NEEE EE E EE E TTT TN xiii Recycling of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE xiv ESD Precautions 5 c3io54 sce vieie e a TOE e added EET xiv Data Security u isapsrrknmnerke peer deep DEERE RENEE ASE REDER ES ERR XV Chapter 1 Introduction Ul MEodudtop Lskadttderrdamikensgttkbenededdunsektue A EEEO 2 1 1 1 DataDirect Networks Storage Fusion Architecture SFA asananavnen 2 112 Product Variations 6c asccccrvewrevnten ste kassene eik vee inn 2 1 1 3 FeaturesoftheSFA10000 aranananenennenenenenenennenenenenennenene 3 1 2 The SFA10000 System Hardware sasuunnnnnnnnnnnnsnnrnnnnnnnennnnrnrnnnneeene 5 1 2 1 Status LED Indicators asananenennananenenennananenenenennanenenenener 7 122 RaimMOdul sies seca caeren tedanaundus het acausderdad eames Grend 8 1 23 Power Supply Module 0 ccc ccc cece eee e eee n ene n ence ene eenens 8 1 24 Internal Disk Modules nenunuananenenennenenenenenennenenenen
73. the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ_ONLY controls read only access PRESENT_HOME_ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user specified LUN number that the virtual disk will show to the host 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 130 Presentations 4 9 1 Presentation Menu Figure 155 shows the Presentation pull down menu Figure 155 Presentation Menu Presentation Create Initiator Create Presentation Delete Host i Delete Initiator Delete Presentation Import Initiator Set Application Channel Attributes Set Host Attributes Set Presentation Attributes Set Stack Attributes Show Application Channels Show Hosts Show Initiators Show Presentations Show Stack 4 9 2 Show Presentations To display the list of configured presentations Figure 156 select Presentation gt Show Presentations Figure 156 Show Presentations Screen PRESENTATION SHOW PRESENTATIONS INDEX pogr MRTUAL LUN READ PRESENT Port Pott Pot2 Por3 Pod Pott Pon2 Pon3 Pod Pott Potz Pon3 Pod Pot Porz Por DISK ONLY HOMEONLY CORPO CORPO CORPO CORPO CORPI CORPI CORPI CORP1 C1RPO C1RPO CIRPO CIRPO CIRP1 C1RP1 CIRP1 CIRP1 O mto wt 0 A NE N en Se E NE CA O ONENEN
74. v 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 4 N v v 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 N vA N 15416 0 10 DIF 9 1 J N 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 s v N s 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 4 N v v Free Raid Capacity Total Raw Capacity pool 16 STORAGE 64KB 512 bytes RAID6 0 GB 18240 GB vi DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 119 4 6 2 96 00259 001 Rev C Create a Storage Pool A storage pool on a SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level Storage Pools Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recovery in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a storage pool For maximum data protection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6 e Chunk Size The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the storage pool NOTE There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed RAID1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk e Disk Count A RAIDI storage pool may consists of 2 physical disks A RAID5 storage pool may consist of 5 or 9 physical disks A RAID6 storage poo
75. vd 0 name LUN VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 3 4 4 Deleting a Virtual Disk The DELETE VIRTUAL_DISK lt id gt command deletes the specified virtual disk from the system However it does not delete presentations for that virtual disks If a presentation is configured for a virtual disk deleting the virtual disk will return an error You must first delete all the presentations configured on that virtual disk see Section 3 6 3 Presentation Commands When you delete a virtual disk you lose access to all data that was stored on that virtual disk Warning 3 4 5 Presentation to Hosts not applicable on SFA10000E Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access Refer to Section 2 7 12 Present Virtual Disk to External Host SFA10000 Only for detailed instructions on configuring virtual disk presentations to hosts Refer to Section 3 6 Presentations for more information on commands related to presentation 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 64 Spare Pool Management 3 5 Spare Pool Management The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pool which contains Physical Disks that can be used as spare disks spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool After a spare
76. 0 762mm To Do List e Plan the location of the racks so that they have sufficient access and proper airflow A scale drawing is recommended The best way to accomplish this is to create rows of racks that are side by side where each rack draws cool air from a 60 1524 mm walking isle and blows hot air into a 48 1220 mm maintenance isle Figure 19 Figure 19 Rows of Racks with Walking Isles and Maintenance Isles WarmArReum 7 Walking Isle 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 16 Site Preparation 223 Floor Loading The SFA10000 racks are heavy and it is important to verify that the weight does not exceed the floor specifications DDN will provide an estimate of the weight of each rack on request A full 45U SFA10000 rack with ten SS6000 disk enclosures can weigh up to 2570 Ibs 1166 kg This weight is relatively evenly distributed across the four castors and or leveling feet so each will be subject to a load of 645 lbs While the load from such a rack is 289 lb ft 2570 Ib 8 9ft underneath the rack the average load is less given the space for isles With the minimum size isles 48 in the front and 30 in the back the load is 156 Ib ft 289 lb ft x 45 75 45 75 482 30 2 The more common 42U SFA10000 racks for 5 and 10 disk enclosure subsystems weigh approximately 1600 lbs and so the point load is only 400 Ibs and the floor loading is 180
77. 0 Only 008 46 2 7 12 1 Special Considerations for MAC OS 2 cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eees 48 2 7 12 2 Selective Presentation ccc cece eee eee e eee te eeneeeeeeeeneenaees 49 2 7 13 Storage Pool Initialization cece cee cn eee nen tent anenes 49 Chapter 3 Administration 36 Managing the SEATOOOO Lunar ke ed aes haker 51 3 1 1 Management Interface aranenunnananenennnnanenenenennanenenenenene 51 3 1 2 User LOGINS sanser damer ness 52 3 1 3 Available Commands asanonenvnnanenenenennanenenenennanenenenenene 52 3 1 3 1 Basic Key Operations 0cccccccreseecsesanecevneveedsnceiseseeeetanneaees 53 52 Physical Disk Information si srrssicnnrik orrs nnana nE EEEE EEE AEEA NEEE 54 3 2 1 Disk Information arananananenuanenenenennenenenenenennenenenenenner 54 322 DISkSt tes usanne eee as EAR ewe anies EEDE 55 323 Visual INGICALION auasseandr sakariedeet sadariereeteeied henne esnme danene 56 3 3 Storage Pool Management wv cies ovens sice sess rker sere eine eee 57 3 3 1 Display Storage Pool Information 0 cee ee eee cee e tenet eenees 57 3 3 2 Creating a Storage Pool eee cece cence teen n tent n enn enes 59 3 3 3 Storage Pool Initialization 0 cece riii nrinn a 60 3 3 3 1 Initialization Job Failure cece cece eect nee e eee ennen ennen 60 334 SATASSURC rronin ois a E E esis ane canada aes et 61 3 3 5 Verifying a Storage Pool
78. 001 OFF R W 02484 co test d08 00306 00058 010 OFF R W 02485 co test d08 00306 00059 012 OFF R W Total Presentations 6 Recommendations e At times some hosts may have device discovery issues if there are gaps in the SCSI LUN_ID space Letting the subsystem assign as it will by default the lowest SCSI_ID it can from this subsystem may be considered a best practice e Use ofa host based HBA utility such as HBAnyware or SANsurfer greatly enhances the ability to determine perceived connectivity issues between the storage subsystem and the host e Your hosts multipath driver must be enabled correctly to recognize DDN s Device Hardware ID For Windows Server 2008 the Device Hardware_ID information must be entered into the MPIO stack as an 8 bit 16 character space padded field For Linux OS s the etc multipath conf file must be edited and the Device Hardware_ID is NOT padded with the space character Device Hardware ID DDN SFA10000 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 77 Network Time Protocol Mode 3 7 Network Time Protocol Mode NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 It provides a means for the controllers to synchronize their time across a network usually within a small number of milliseconds over a long period of time You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time servers To enable the NTP mode enter the comm
79. 001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 2 Use the CREATE VIRTUAL DISK command to add more virtual disks as needed If you need to delete a virtual disk use the DELETE VIRTUAL_DISK lt virtual disk id gt command You may assign a name to a virtual disk SET VIRTUAL DISK lt virtual disk id gt NAME lt virtual disk name gt To view the list of configured virtual disks use the command SHOW VIRTUAL_DISK Figure 51 Figure 51 Show Virtual Disk Information Screen RAID 0 show virtual_disk Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 READY 0 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 1 v 1 1 READY 1 5 3632 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 2 2 READY 2 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 3 3 NOT RDY 3 5 5480 W I I O L 0 1 R 0 0x28000003 Total Virtual Disks 4 To display the detailed information of a virtual disk use the command SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 52 Figure 52 Show Virtual_Disk All_Attributes Example Screen KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Virtual Disk s re ar ar aar aar ar ra ar Index 0 OID 0x8c7b0000 Name vd 0_0 Pool Index 0 Pool OID 0x1c790000 Capacity 16 GB Offset 0x0 State READY Raid Level RAID6 O ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MIRRORED TRUE nitializing FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write thru FALSE Current Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Futu
80. 0036000 0402 DDN 5 DISK 0x50001f21003a000 0402 DDN 6 DISK 0x50001f210038000 0402 DDN 7 DISK 0x50001f21002c000 0402 DDN 8 DISK 0x50001210016000 0402 DDN PRODUCT DISK IDENTIFIER SLOT SFA10000 s7000 s7000 s7000 s7000 s7000 s7000 s7000 POWER SUPPLY COOLING ELEMENT TEMP SENSOR EXPANDER UPS You can update the disk enclosure firmware using the Update Enclosure Firmware function After you have obtained the new firmware files select Enclosures gt Update Enclosure Firmware DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 133 Enclosure Menu Figure 162 Update Enclosure Firmware Screen ENCLOSURE UPDATE FIRMWARE PREDICTED FAULT LOCATE CHASIS CHASIS Bios BMC BMC INDEX ENCLOSURE Type VENDOR PRODUCT REVISION ZONES FAILURE BASEBOARD BASEBOARD SERIAL BASEBOARD Firmware OID LOGICAL ID ID ID BEER INDICATOR INDICATOR PART No No DATE PART ode Ver Ver Config ver TCA 00341 1 0x50000001 DISK 0x50001f210020000 DDN ss7000 0402 1 018 USE13000098RB010 04 02 01 2 0x50000002 DISK 0x5000121002e000 0402 0 3 0x50000003 DISK 0x50001210026000 DDN 887000 0402 1 Lorena USE13000098RB013 04 02 01 4 TCA 00341 0x50000004 DISK 0x50001f210036000 ODN 887000 0402 1 Dip USE13000098R800B 04 02 01 TCA 00341 5 0x50000005 DISK 0x50001f210032000 DDN ss7000 0402 1 018 USE13000098RB05C 04 02 01 TCA 00341 6 0x50000006 DISK 0x50001f210038000 DDN 887000 0402 1 0
81. 1 13 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 14 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 15 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 16 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 17 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 18 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 19 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 20 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 21 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 22 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 23 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 24 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 28 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08EB00000C032H8XE UNAS GOOD 224 READY 5000c50020cb0bec 29 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK060Y40000C0368V2V UNAS GOOD 235 READY 5000c50020c5fd24 30 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0613T0000C036BKJH UNAS GOOD 144 READY 5000c50020c60d0c 31 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06BGZ0000C036420K UNAS GOOD 154 READY 50000500104 7c34 32 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0621D0000C036FLVE UNAS GOOD 183 READY 5000050020c60974 33 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8APHO000C035HZNU UNAS GOOD 196 READY 5000c50020cb2a70 34 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8SFHO000CO36FMKT UNAS GOOD 150 READY 5000c50020cb031c 35 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO7QJX0000C0368UBU UNAS GOOD 231 READY 5000c50020c69d c 36 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK03B3A00005018WEQS UNAS GOOD 191 READY 5000c50010334c 0 37 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8RPJO000C035D4F7 2 GOOD 131 NORM 5000c50020cafaf4 38 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK03Q470000C0300851 UNAS GOOD 160 READY
82. 1 are available with the SFA10000 to enable full system performance capacity and the highest levels of disk enclosure fault tolerance e Five 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 300 disk modules at 28U in one rack e Ten 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 600 disk modules at 48U in two racks e Twenty 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 1200 disk modules at 88U in two racks e Five 24 bay disk enclosures with up to 120 disk modules at 18U in one rack Figure 1 SFA10000 Possible Configurations 7 Enclosure System 12 Enclosure System 22 Enclosure System 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 5 Disk Enclosures 10 Disk Enclosures 20 Disk Enclosures 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 2 Introduction 1 1 3 Features of the SFA10000 The SFA10000 incorporates the following features e 8GB s full duplex cache link e Internal SAS Switching 480 Gb s Internal SAS Storage Network Up to 1200 SAS SATA or SSD disks with full redundant paths InfiniBand IB or Fibre Channel FC Connectivity on SFA10000 For SFA10000 IB option the two Controllers provide up to eight 8 QDR InfiniBand host port connections For SFA10000 FC option the two Controllers provide up to sixteen 16 individual 8Gb s Fibre Channel host port connections including simultaneous access to the same data through multiple ports Each FC host port supports point to point and switched fabric
83. 10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide x Important Information THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN AS IS BASIS AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE SUPPORT UPDATES ENHANCEMENTS OR MODIFICATIONS Copyright C 2004 2005 2006 Board of Trustees Leland Stanford Jr University All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR I
84. 14576 GB Total Capacity 18240 GB UUID 0x00 Global Spare Pool pool 6 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Init Policy ALLOW IO Init Priority 508 C Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 86 Performance Management Full Rebuild Priority To change the full rebuild priority value Figure 98 enter the command SET POOL lt id gt REBUILD FULL POLICY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is an integer in the range of 1 to 99 The default value specifies a priority of 80 Figure 98 Set Full Rebuild Priority RAID 0 set pool 3 rebuild full policy 70 POOL 3 OID 0x19b40003 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 Partial Rebuild Priority To change the partial rebuild priority value Figure 99 enter the command SET POOL lt id gt REBUILD PARTIAL POLICY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is an integer in the range of 1 to 99 The default value specifies a priority of 90 Figure 99 Set Partial Rebuild Priority RAID 0 set pool 3 rebuild_partial_policy 80 POOL 3 OID 0x19b40003 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 87 Firmware Update Management 3 11 Firmware Update Management DataDirect Networks periodically releases firmware updates to enhance features
85. 15 USE13000098RB009 04 02 01 7 TCA 00341 0x50000007 DISK 0x5000121002c000 DDN 887000 0402 1 018 USE13000098RB017 04 02 01 zea amaaa El Select Firmware file TNT E UPDATE ENCLOSURE FIRMWARE At the Update Firmware screen Figure 162 click to select the enclosure to update Locate the firmware file and click UPDATE ENCLOSURE FIRMWARE Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update Also refer to Section 3 11 3 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure on page 92 for detailed instructions 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 134 Chapter 5 Support 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 135 RAID 0 S Prompt is not shown correctly This section describes common problems with possible solutions which can occur with the SFA10000 system 5 1 RAID 0 Prompt is not shown correctly The default CLUI prompt is RAID 0 If CLUI is shown instead of RAID 0 one of the following problems may have occurred e The firmware on this controller is in a MIR state and the MIR state needs to be resolved Refer to Section 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States on page 137 for troubleshooting information e The CLUI has lost communication with the firmware or the firmware is not running A restart of the system is needed e There are multiple CLUI connections to the firmware al
86. 153014VL5300 SAS 136 15K A410 JFVSUSPC5301 0 GOOD 483 NORM 5000cca00d2b4c48 2 3 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEV8XYGC5301 0 GOOD 487 NORM 5000cca00d103e94 2 42 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JFVPKHUC5301 0 GOOD 477 NORM 5000cca00d273618 Total Physical Disks 6 Total Assigned Disks 6 Total Unassigned Disks 0 Total SAS Disks 6 Total Member State Normal 6 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 58 Storage Pool Management The SHOW POOL lt id gt VIRTUAL_DISK command displays the list of virtual disks associated with the specified storage pool Figure 76 Figure 76 Show Storage Pool Virtual Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show pool 0 vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 READY 0 5 3632 W E O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 1 3 3 2 Creating a Storage Pool A storage pool on the SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recovery in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a Storage Pool For maximum
87. 2 168 0 1 0 e SSH You can use a standard terminal program with SSH support to connect to a VM console This is done by specifying a specific port to the SSH connection address The valid ports are 5555 5558 each representing the VM you wish to connect to For example if the IP address of the controller is 192 168 0 1 and you want to connect to the first VM using a standard Linux shell enter root 192 168 0 1 0 NOTE The default password for the root user is password This should be changed immediately on each VM The SFA10000E initial configuration is complete at this point The procedures given in Sections 2 7 9 through 2 7 13 can be skipped With root access to each Virtual Machine you are now able to configure your ExaScaler or GridScaler file system 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 39 Configuring the SFA10000 2 7 9 Create Storage Pools A storage pool on a SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level RAID Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recovery in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a storage pool For maximum data pr
88. 27 5 Set the System Name You may set the system name using the command Figure 42 SET SUBSYSTEM NAME lt name gt To verify the new setting enter the command SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 42 Set Subsystem Name RAID 0 set subsystem name SFA10000 SUBSYSTEM attributes set STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 show subsystem all RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60000000000000000000000030000000 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 37 Configuring the SFA10000 276 Set System Time amp Date NTP NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time servers To enable the NTP mode enter the command SET SUBSYSTEM NTP lt ip address list up to 4 gt NONE Specifying a list of NTP addresses will start the NTP mode on each controller using that list of NTP addresses as the time servers Specifying NONE will turn off NTP mode To display the current settings enter the command Figure 43 SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 43 Show NTP Settings OR RR KK KK KR RK Subsystem ig KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60001 0800a30000000000030000000 Subsystem Time Fri Apr 22 6 26 39 2011 Locate Dwell Time 120 seconds Fast Timeout ON Pool Verify Priority 10 NTP Mode ON 10 32 16 24 10 32 16 25 10 32 16 26 10 32 16 27 Drive Error Tolerance HIGH
89. 3 Map ahost to a discovered initiator Enter the command Figure 61 APPLICATION IMPORT DISCOVERED INITIATOR lt initiator id gt HOST lt host id gt where lt initiator id gt is the index name of the discovered initiator lt host id gt is the index name of the host Figure 61 Map a Host to a Discovered Initiator RAIDS app import discovered_initiator 6 host 0 INITIATOR 0 OID 0x280f 0000 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 6 oid 0X30000006 STATUS Success 0x0 Use the APPLICATION IMPORT command to map the other hosts to the initiators as needed 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 47 Configuring the SFA10000 To display the current mappings enter the command Figure 62 APPLICATION SHOW INITIATOR Figure 62 Show Current Imported Initiators RAIDS app show initiator Host Initiator Identifier Index Type Index node port 00000 FC 00000 0x2001001b32aeb280 0x2001001b32aeb280 Total FC Initiators 1 4 Present the virtual disks to the hosts Enter the command Figure 63 APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt where lt host id gt is the index name of the host lt vd id gt is the virtual disk to be presented lt LUN id gt is the LUN that the specified virtual disk will be presented as or use the default value if it is not specified Figure 63 Create a Presentation RA
90. 30007eb8a IB s p F ae s P P 21 M 0x2c9030007eb8c 0x2c9030007eb8a 1B v P J P P v v P INDEX SELECT HOST HOST NAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS 0 Host 0001 o og LINUX 1 r Host 0002 0 Oxt LINUX 2 r Host 0003 o og LINUX IMPORT INITIATOR 4 9 3 3 Present Virtual Disks to Hosts 1 Select Presentation gt Create Presentation 2 At the Create Presentation screen Figure 159 select a host and the virtual disk s Figure 159 Create Presentation Screen INDEX SELECT HOST HOST NAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS C ALL HOSTS 0 c Host_0001 0 Oxt LINUX 1 a Host_0002 0 0x1 LINUX 2 c Host_0003 0 0x1 LINUX LUN SEL Leave vo POOL CAP READ PRESENT Porto Port Port2 Port3 p PRESENT STATE RAID Bank tor ort0 Port1 Port2 Port3 Port0 Portt Port2 Port3 Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 T NANE _ Amons NAME GB ONLY HOME r CORPO CORPO CORPO CO RPO CORP CORP1 CORP1 CORP1 C1 RPO CIRPO C1RPO CIRPO CIRP1 C1IRP1 C1 RP1 CERP1 Seen a a a Hu poo READYRAIDS16 O r ff Pr RoR FP RB RK RK BW FR WR WM WM FR BS 4 Pol RRs o r Of KR RB RK KR BW KB KR RK KR RF KR KF WP RB RF FP mo 4 fl Rosas r TT FR BR KR FR RK KR RK RK BR KR RK RK W KR RF FP ERE gt ss TT 6 RP PR K KW KR KR RE KR RF KR KF RE RF RF FP E 4 Bot O oF f BR RK K K RK KR RF RK RK KR RK FR WW RF F is 1 Sct gRs OO r KR KR BF BP ER FR RF RB BP RF RB PB BF RF FR CRE
91. 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way thro
92. 5 UNAS GOOD 162 READY 5000050020c62518 Total Physical Disks 300 Total Assigned Disks 22 Total Unassigned Disks 98 Total SAS Disks 300 Total Member State Normal 22 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 54 3 2 2 96 00259 001 Rev C Physical Disk Information To display the list of unassigned disks enter the command SHOW UNASSIGNED_POOL PHYSICAL DISK To retrieve information about a specific disk enter the command SHOW PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 71 Figure 71 Physical Disk Information Example Screen EEEE EEEE EE IR III I IR ak ak ak ak Physical Disk s EHE A AE DK II H H AE E IOC IIR ICC kok Index 852 OID 0x20770354 Pool Index UNASSIGNED Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 536 GB Raw Capacity 558 GB Base 2 600 GB Base 10 Block Size 512 Available Channels 02 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 22 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 36 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Enabled Path IDs 0x174 0x20d0 0x218 0x2218 Enclosure Index 1 Enclosure OID 0x50000001 Disk Slot as 1 Vendor ID HITACHI Product ID HUS156060VLS600 Product Revision ASDO Serial Number JWV3LUPE Health State GOOD Rotation Speed 15000 RPM Device Type SAS Member State UNASSIGNED State READY Spare FALSE Failed FALSE UUID 0x5000cca00f068f2c Interposer Type NONE Update in Progress FALSE If there is a failed disk use the SHOW UNA
93. 5000c50010386b68 39 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO48GNO000C0358PJD UNAS GOOD 195 READY 5000c50020cb0990 40 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO4XPX0000C030JNQV UNAS GOOD 167 READY 5000c50010468258 41 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6X410000C031DRBQ UNAS GOOD 226 READY 5000c500104fdfa4 42 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO7XAT0000C0214TUW UNAS GOOD 155 READY 5000c50020cb0e18 43 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8RZKO000C030EKKL 2 GOOD 129 NORM 5000c50020cafdec 44 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6PDX0000C032H8PR UNAS GOOD 149 READY 50000500104c07a4 45 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6ANCO000C029 82U UNAS GOOD 216 READY 5000c500104ee58c 46 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO763Z0000C03611SH UNAS GOOD 185 READY 5000c500104f6ca0 47 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK075RV00005006TK08 UNAS GOOD 182 READY 5000c500104 62a0 48 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6LRGO000C0294GYC UNAS GOOD 168 READY 5000c50020c60248 49 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO4SMH0000C0214THP UNAS GOOD 171 READY 5000c50010486f74 50 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6NMJO000C0358071 UNAS GOOD 211 READY 5000c500104c9ac0 51 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 QWKOGWHHOOOOCO3190PT UNAS GOOD 215 READY 5000c50020c62dbe 52 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK05Y7P0000C0366HN6 UNAS GOOD 225 READY 5000050020c62dd0 53 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO772L0000C0368V8
94. 522560 MBs UUID 0x00 Global Spare Pool Oxla0f000a Initializing FALSE Rebuilding TRUE pi Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Data Lost FALSE Current Home 0x0015b2a122b20000 0x00000000 Future Home Oxffffffffffffffff 0Ox00000000 Preferred Home Oxffffffffffffffff Ox00000000 BkgdJob OID 0x2b050003 BkgdJob Priority 80 Total Phy Disks 5 Spare Disk Rebuilding State NOREDUNDANCY Member Size 704512 MB pID State UUID 0x0191 RBLD 0x5000cca215c56e02 Y 0x004e NORM 0x5000cca215c5709c 0x0040 NORM 0x5000cca215c54c71 0x0041 NORM 0x5000cca215c5675c 0x0042 NORM 0x5000cca215c56e55 5 4 2 Spare Disk Replacement Upon completion of a rebuild the spare disk becomes a member of the storage pool replacing the failed disk After you have replaced the failed disk with a new disk the new disk is added to the Unassigned Pool It is recommended that you assign this new disk to the spare pool to replace the spare disk that has been used 5 4 3 When a Spare is not available When a disk is failed by the system and there is no spare disk available you need to replace the failed disk immediately After you have replaced the failed disk with a new disk you can initiate a rebuild as described below 1 Enter command SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL ALL to identify the new disk s index name 2 Enter command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt new disk id gt TO POOL lt pool id gt SET_SPARE where lt new disk id gt is the index name of the replacement
95. 90 G 0 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2010 2 11 5 8 48 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C765CD3B2B 000023 2010 02 06 04 49 20 5069068 G 3 5 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOGRECEIVED FROM STATE 000022 2010 02 06 04 49 20 4952631 G 0 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2010 2 6 4 49 20 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C7A302483D To display the event log starting at the specified start sequence number in ascending sequence number order Figure 104 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG ASCEND START_SEQUENCE lt start sequence number gt Figure 104 Show Controller Log Example Screen 3 RAID 0 SHOW CONTROLLER 1 LOG ASCEND START SEQUENCE 20 000021 2010 02 06 04 49 20 4731906 G 4 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_MIR_STATE STATE MIR STATE STATE 000A 000022 2010 02 06 04 49 20 4952631 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2010 2 6 4 49 20 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C7A302483D 000023 2010 02 06 04 49 20 5069068 G 3 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOG RECEIVED FROM STATE 000024 2010 02 11 05 08 48 7027390 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2010 2 11 5 8 48 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET
96. ALSE The default setting is FALSE which allows automatic switching to write thru mode upon loss of one controller 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 83 3 10 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Performance Management Right Side I O Access to virtual disks uses the notion of a preferred home or homed path If a path to the VD utilizes the peer controller additional latency is incurred for every I O as it must be processed first by the non homed controller and forwarded over the same communication path used by Mirrored Write Back Cache Figure 91 Figure 91 Path to VD Utilizes the Peer Controller J Controller 0 Controller 1 FC IB 10Ge FC IB 10Ge RAM RAM I O Bridge CPU CPU LS SAS Properly configured and tested host side multi path drivers will ensure right side I O will occur If poor performance is encountered especially upon initial configuration then verifying and correcting your primary path to disks is essential 1 0 Bridge 1 Verify by reviewing the virtual disk counters enter the command Figure 92 SHOW VD COUNTERS NOTE You need to enter this command three times first time to initiate the counters second time to display the results third time to reset the counters Controller 0 s results are
97. ATE PRESENTATION OPTIONAL To present a virtual disk to all host ports on both controllers promiscuous mode select ALL HOSTS instead of individual hosts NOTE The promiscuous mode may not be used with persistent reservations The ALL HOSTS setting will cause SCSI2 3 Reservation commands to fail 3 Then select the mask options and enter the Logical Unit Number LUN 4 Click CREATE PRESENTATION The newly created presentation is displayed 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 132 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 96 00259 001 Rev C Enclosure Menu Figure 160 shows the Enclosures pull down menu Figure 160 Enclosure Menu Enclosures Locate Enclosure Show Cooling Elements Show Disk Slots Show Enclosures Show Expanders Show Power Supply Show Temperature Sensors Show UPS Update Enclosure Firmware Show Enclosures Enclosure Menu The Show Enclosures function displays all the controllers and disk enclosures that are installed in the SFA10000 system Figure 161 Clicking on the highlighted item will bring up the detailed information of that component Figure 161 Show Enclosures Screen ENCLOSURE SHOW ALL ENCLOSURES Update Enclosure Firmware N ISI mogo mee isoro de 6 CONTROLLER 0x1ff08032f0000 0000 DDN a DISK 0x50001f210020000 0402 DDN 2 DISK 0x5000121002e000 0402 5 DISK 0x50001210026000 0402 DDN 4 DISK 0x50001f21
98. B Offset 0x0 State READY Raidlevel RAID6 IO ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MIRRORED TRUE Initializing FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write thru FALSE Current Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL Future Home Oxffffffff 0x00000000 Preferred Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL Job OID INACTIVE UUID 60001 0800a3000000000008a680000 Total Virtual Disks 1 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 63 Virtual Disk Management 3 4 2 Creating a Virtual Disk To create a virtual disk enter the command CREATE VIRTUAL DISK CAPACITY lt capacity gt POOL lt pool id gt where lt capacity gt is the capacity of the virtual disk in GiB or type max to use all available capacity lt pool id gt is the storage pool to be used by this virtual disk Figure 81 A message is displayed to indicate whether the virtual disk creation was successful Figure 81 Create Virtual Disks Example Screen RAID 0 create virtual_disk capacity 16 pool 0 VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 create virtual_disk capacity 32 pool 0 VIRTUAL DISK 1 OID 0x89bb001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 3 4 3 Naming a Virtual Disk The SET VIRTUAL_DISK lt id gt NAME lt name gt command lets you specify a name to identify the virtual disk Figure 82 Figure 82 Set Virtual Disk Name Example Screen RAID 0 set
99. B SATAssure None Cache Settings ReACT FALSE IO Routing TRUE Mirroring TRUE Read Ahead TRUE Write Back TRUE Initializing FALSE Rebuilding FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write Thru FALSE Current Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Future Home Oxffffffff 0x00000000 Preferred Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Job OID INACTIVE Total Phy Disks 10 State NORMAL Member Size 2736 GB pID State UUID 0x0459 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b913 0x0329 NORM 0x5000cca225c2c89c 0x0462 NORM 0x5000cca225c2a53f 0x0466 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b738 0x046c NORM 0x5000cca225c2a653 0x0470 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b179 0x030c NORM 0x5000cca225c2dlba 0x046 NORM 0x5000cca225c28b8d 0x0479 NORM 0x5000cca225c2dadf 0x0473 NORM 0x5000cca225c28bce Total Storage Pools 1 The SHOW POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISK command displays the list of disks associated with the specified storage pool Figure 75 Figure 75 Show Storage Pool Physical Disks Example Screen JI IR AOKI II I RR I I I IR KI Physical Disk s KK Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WIN 1 37 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEVWMZNC5301 0 GOOD 611 NORM 5000cca00d324438 1 39 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A140 J4V1YYAA5301 0 GOOD 481 NORM 5000cca005039324 1 51 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JFVWL5YC5301 0 GOOD 479 NORM 5000cca00d32293c 2 1 HITACHI HUS
100. C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 156 B Disk Module Installation This appendix provides detailed instructions on how to install a disk module in the SS6000 SS7000 and SS2460 enclosures B 1 S56000 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE TheSS6000 design allows for disk bays to be left empty without the need for fitting dummy disk modules 1 Squeeze the release tabs together on the front panel and carefully pull the enclosure forward out of the rack Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound 2 Disengage both enclosure cover latches Figure 177 and open the covers Figure 177 SS6000 Enclosure Cover Latch DJ Latch DisengagedP gt I 3 Onthe disk module slide the latch backward to release the handle Figure 178 Figure 178 Release Disk Module Handle 1 Slide Latch Backward 2 Lift Handle 4 Insert the module into a disk bay Cam the disk module home The camming foot on the base of the module will engage into the slot in the enclosure 5 When the module is fully inserted close the handle You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed 6 After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover latches 7 Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 Us
101. CONTROLLER DIED RAID 0 show controller OID 0x38000000 Index 0000 Name A LOCAL PRIMARY Total Controllers 1 Refer to the DDN SFA Service Manual for a complete list of event log entries 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 136 5 3 96 00259 001 Rev C Manual Intervention Required MIR States Manual Intervention Required MIR States Manual Intervention Required MIR represents a condition with the controller that requires the user to provide a solution before proceeding with normal controller operations This is to guard against the controller firmware from executing operations that may not necessarily be the desired operation of the user These conditions will most likely be seen in a new system installation environment For example when a system is booted and the backend physical disks have never been installed behind the controllers the controller firmware has never had a chance to write out configuration metadata The controller recognizes that there is no valid metadata and requires the user to acknowledge proceeding or not Use the SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the MIR condition of the controller you are logged into Figure 163 Figure 163 Show Controller Information Screen RAID 0 show controller 0 all Index 0 OID 0x38000000 Firmware Version Release 1 4 Source Version 4476 Fully Checked In Yes Private Build No Build Ty
102. Component Failures 0 cece cece cece cece cece eeeneeeees 150 5 7 1 I O Module Replacement cece cece eee e cece ence e ence ene eenens 150 57 2 DEM Replacement on SS6000 0 cece cece eee cece eee ene ee ee ee ene 151 5 73 SAS Cable Replacement asonananannanenenenunanenerenenenennenenenenr 152 Appendices Appendix A Technical Specifications 0 cece cece cece eee e eee eeaee 154 Appendix B Disk Module Installation cece ccc cece cece eees 157 B 1 S56000 Disk Module Installation Procedure 0c cece cece eee e eee 157 B 2 SS7000 Disk Module Installation Procedure 0 cece cece cece eens 158 B 3 SS2460 Disk Module Installation Procedure eee ece cece eee eee 159 Appendix C 56000 Disk Maps for SFA10000E 0 0 cece eee ees 160 Appendix D 56000 Zoning Configuration Procedure 065 161 Appendix E Rack Installation Procedure cc cc cece cece nee ee eees 163 E 1 Rackmounting the Controller 0 cc cece cece eee eee nent eee enee 163 E 2 Rackmounting the UPS Unit cece eee cece eee eee een tent ence 169 Appendix F FRU Part Numbers ccc cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 171 Appendix G Terminology cccc cece cece eee e tect eeeeeeeeenees 173 DON E E SEERNE REESE DEERE SEE O 175 Contacting Technical Support
103. D 1 application import discovered 12 host 304 INITIATOR 13 OID 0x2d67000d imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 12 OID 0x3000000c STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application import discovered 4 host 306 INITIATOR 14 OID 0x2d68000e imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 4 OID 0x30000004 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application import discovered 8 host 306 INITIATOR 15 OID 0x2d69000f imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 8 OID 0x30000008 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 app import discovered 6 host 305 INITIATOR 16 OID 0x2d6a0010 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 6 OID 0x30000006 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 app imp disc 7 host 305 INITIATOR 17 OID 0x2d6b0011 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 7 OID 0x30000007 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application show initiator Host Initiator Identifier Index Type Index node name port name 00012 FC 00304 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2100001b32827e95 00013 FC 00304 0x2001001b32a27e95 0x2101001b32a27e95 00014 FC 00306 0x20000000c98107cb 0x10000000c98107cb 00015 FC 00306 0x20000000c98107ca 0x10000000c98107ca 00016 FC 00305 0x20000000c9813a47 0x10000000c9813a47 00017 FC 00305 0x20000000c9813a46 0x10000000c9813a46 Total FC Initiators 6 Present a Virtual Disk to a Host From your list of virtual disks that have been created identify the host that you wish to present this LUN to and create the presentation
104. D POOL SHOW ALL PHYSICAL DISKS POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS TOTAL CAPACITY GB FAILED CAPACITY GB unassigned 64 8 INDEX PHYSICAL TYPE Rou BOL HEALTH mg MEMBER BOSE CAPACITY Sor osure EDOR PRODUCTID REMBION SERIAL NU 144 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 18683 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR6 143 0x25ad008f SATA 7200 Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 9 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR3 0x25c10097 SATA 7200 Unassigned FAILED READY UNASSIGNED 1863 11 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGRD 0x25b00092 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 14 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRP 0x25af0091 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 27 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRP 0x25030095 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 29 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOJF 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 117 4 5 2 96 00259 001 Rev C Unassigned Pool Locate Unassigned Pool To locate the disks in the unassigned pool select Pools gt Locate Unassigned Pool Click on unassigned to display the disk map Figure 134 e Green color indicates a healthy disk that is available e White color indicates a healthy disk that has been assigned to either a storage pool or spare pool e Orange color indicates that the disk has failed Click LOCATE to flash the status LED on the unassigned
105. Direct Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 26 Cable Connections Figure 27 Connecting 5 x SS6000 Enclosures to SFA10000E Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module B 022 122 Disk Enclosure 2 I O Module A I O Module B 020 120 Disk Enclosure 3 I O Module 032 Disk Enclosure 4 I O Module A I O Module B 030 130 Disk Enclosure 5 I O Module A I O Module B 042 142 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 27 Cable Connections Figure 28 Connecting 10 x SS6000 Enclosures to SFA10000E Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 1 0 Module A 1 0 Module 020 120
106. Disks and Enclosures CM Cache Manager Implements read and write back cache RAID Implements RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 1 and rebuilds MAD Data transfer and parity calculations RT Routing Routes VD request to the right CM IOF I O Forwarding Routes PD requests to the right AMPD DUCK Dual controller communication JOI JEX JIPC MIS JTS Infrastructure communication and testing DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 100 3 13 3 13 1 3132 5 13 5 Remote Management of SFA10000 Remote Management of SFA10000 The SFA10000 can be managed locally through the RS 232 interface or remotely via SSH The CLUI is the same regardless of the management interface RS 232 or SSH Network Connection Connect the Ethernet port on the back of the controllers to your Ethernet network Figure 106 Then configure the network interface as described below Figure 106 Ethernet Connections to Your Network Controller Your Management Network NOTE Currently the SFA10000 does not support network configuration protocols such as DHCP or BOOTP Display Network Interface Attributes To display the current network interface settings enter the command Figure 107 UI SHOW NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL REMOTE O 1 where LOCAL gives you information on the c
107. Figure 89 Figure 89 Show Pool All Attributes RAID 0 show pool 0 all Free Raid6 Capacity Max VD Size Total Capacity UUID Global Spare Pool 0 GB 0 GB 720 GB Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 60001 0800a3000000000001a520000 Oxlaca000e Index 14 d DiskTimeout FRT 1 minute To change the disk timeout setting use this command SET POOL lt id gt DISK TIMEOUT lt timeout gt where lt timeout gt is in the range of lt 0 240 gt minutes The default setting is 10 Sparing Policy Each storage pool has a sparing policy that determines what happens when a physical disk within the pool fails or becomes inaccessible In the event of a disk failure the SFA10000 will automatically initiate a disk rebuild if the sparing policy is set to automatic and a spare pool has been assigned to the storage pool Use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the current settings Figure 90 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 80 Disk Rebuild Figure 90 Show Pool All Attributes RAID 0 show pool 0 all Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE UUID 0x00 C Global Spare Pool Oxlaca000e Index 14 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Init Policy ALLOW IO Init Priority 50 Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90
108. GNED POOL FAILED provides a visual indication of the disk modules that have failed The status LED of the disk modules will blink SSN ee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 56 Storage Pool Management 3 3 Storage Pool Management The SFA10000 creates centrally managed and vendor independent storage pooling It enables different types of storage to be aggregated into a single logical storage resource from which virtual volumes virtual disks can be served up to multi vendor host computers The networked storage pools will provide the framework to manage the growth in storage demand from web based applications database growth network data intensive applications and disaster tolerance capabilities 351 Display Storage Pool Information You can add and remove storage pools without affecting system operations Use the SHOW POOL command to display the current list of storage pools Figure 73 Figure 73 Show Storage Pool List Example Screen kokk Pool s TT Total Free Max Disk Global Spare Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings Jobs T O spare pool Policy 0 pool 0 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 2 pool 2 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 3 pool 3 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 4 pool 4 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 5 pool 5 N
109. GS2MRS sl Pool pool 21 Enclosure 1 Slot 1 4 4 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool If you need to remove a disk from a spare pool select Physical Disks gt Remove from Spare Figure 130 Select the disk and click REMOVE Figure 130 Remove Disks Screen POOL NAME HEALTH PD STATE MEMBER os VENDOR ID PRODUCT ID sesos GOOG READY 1 T3100042488 spam sos GOOG READY 1 1 73100042488 spare sos GOOG READY 5T3900042455 spare pocio BOUD READY w p STI10042455 spare poa GOOG READY 73100042455 spare poss BBB READY STI 00042455 4 4 4 Assign Disk to Pools You can add a disk to a spare pool or a storage pool at any time select Physical Disks gt Assign to Pool Figure 131 Select the disk s and the pool Click ASSIGN TO POOL to save the changes Figure 131 Assign Disks to Pool Screen PHYSICAL DISK ASSIGN TO POOL INDEX SELECT PHYSICAL Type SPEED HEALTH FORMATTED DISK ENCL VENDOR propuCTID PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER DISK OID RPM CAPACITY GB SLOT OSURE ID REVISION 18 NW 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS w F Ox25ad008 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 9 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR35VP 146 r 0x25b00092 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 14 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRPV7P 145 r 0x25at0091 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 27 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRPVEP 1 r 0x25530095 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 29 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKADA3EA JK1171YAHOJPNN 141
110. HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JEVWMZNC5301 UNAS GOOD 279 READ 1 6 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 J4V1YYAA5301 UNAS GOOD 280 READ 1 17 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JEVWLSYC5301 UNAS GOOD 282 READ i 18 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS GOOD 277 READ SSS ee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 98 The System Logs 3 12 The System Logs 3 12 1 Displaying Event Logs To display the event log starting at the start sequence number in ascending sequence number order Figure 102 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG ASCEND Figure 102 Show Controller Log Example Screen 1 RAID 0 show controller 0 log ascend 000001 2010 06 04 01 03 26 6418393 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ES UPS CLIENT ATTRIBUTE NAME ES Controller enclosure 0x1f 0800a30000 UPS attribute 0 000002 2010 06 04 01 03 26 6418400 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ES UPS CLIENT ATTRIBUTE CHANGED ES Controller UPS attribute 0 changed to 37 000003 2010 06 04 01 04 52 8320854 G 3 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOG RECEIVED FROM STATE To display the event log starting at the start sequence number in descending sequence number order Figure 103 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG DESCEND Figure 103 Show Controller Log Example Screen 2 RAID 0 SHOW CONTROLLER 1 LOG DESCEND 000024 2010 02 11 05 08 48 70273
111. HyperTerminal minicom and screen and use the following settings for the serial connection Bits per second 115 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 2 Once connected press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Validate the Hardware 1 Enter SHOW ENCLOSURE ALL Figure 38 Show Enclosure Status TR KKK OK RE Enclosure s ig KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Index 0 Enclosure 0x50000000 Type CONTROLLER Logical ID 0x0001 0801c90000 Vendor ID DD Product ID SFA10000 Revision 0000 Zones 0 Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part number B48 DTIAAD6G00D100 Baseboard serial number 33759 1017 00200 Baseboard date 20091005 Chassis part number X3B70W50A81XXXXXXP Chassis serial number 516 100427003000 BIOS version GEMDV233 BMC version DDGENO50 BMC config JANUSC21 Firmware version 1 4 lt gj _ Controller Firmware Version Index 1 Enclosure 0x50000001 Type DISK Logical ID 0x50001 210030000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID 557000 Revision 0402 Zones 2 4 Zoning Configuration Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part numbmer USE13000098RBO05D Firmware version 04 02 01 gj Disk Enclosure Firmware Version FPGA version 0008 ndex 2 Enclosure 0x50000002 Type
112. ID app create presentation host 0 vd 0 lun 0 PRESENTATION 0 OID 0x0x20110000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 To simply present the virtual disk to all host ports for both controllers promiscuous mode use this command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt HOST ALL Use the APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION command to configure other presentations as needed To display the current settings enter the command Figure 64 APPLICATION SHOW PRESENTATION Figure 64 Show Current Presentations RAIDS app show presentation Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller Pres Host Host VD Home Read RP O RP 1 RP O RP Index Name Index Index LUN Only Only 0123 0123 0123 012 00000 serverl portl 00000 00000 000 OFF R W Total Presentations 1 270121 Special Considerations for MAC OS Apple s Mac OS X Server does not adhere to the FC specification with regards to node naming Apple expects the node name to vary from port to port while the FC specification calls for it to remain constant A mode setting is provided to force the node name to be unique on a given client channel Fibre Channel port This mode can be set for one or more client channels While the feature is aimed at Mac SANs it can also be used for connections to heterogeneous client SANs When creating the host specify the OSTYPE to be MAC_OS APPLICATION CREATE HOST OSTYPE MAC OS Refer to Section 3 6 4 Additiona
113. Intervention Required MIR States MIR_NO_CONFIG A configuration could not be created on the backend disks Fix the condition that prevents this controller from creating a configuration on the backend disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup MIR_NO_QUORUM No quorum disks could be found within the disk modules on the backend Fix the condition that prevents the quorum disks from being seen This may be caused by the disks never being in the storage array This will normally happen on new system installations Use the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR_STATE command to create an empty configuration NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed MIR_NOT_LAST_CONTROLLER This controller found a valid configuration but was not present when another controller owned the configuration Since the controller was not present it does not know if another controller may have cached data for this configuration This may happen when controllers are swapped out or if the controllers went down and restarted individually In many cases this MIR state will resolve itself by communicating with the other controller and obtaining permission to use the found configuration If the MIR state does not resolve itself in 3 minutes contact DDN Technical Support MIR_MULTIPLE_JIS Multiple configurations were found on the quorum disks This may happen if the disks from one system were installed in another
114. K 0006 9WKO6C4N0000C0325YY2 UNAS GOOD 169 READY 50000500104 8550 2K 0006 9WKO8JEBO000S018YULO UNAS GOOD 179 READY 5000c50020cb1158 2K 0006 9WK06C3F0000C0326TSF UNAS GOOD 178 READY 50000500104 7b78 2K 0006 9WK068QL0000C035J0U4 UNAS GOOD 153 READY 50000500104f1c94 2K 0006 9WK089DZ0000C029F1JW UNAS GOOD 186 READY 5000c50020cb057c 2K 0006 9WKO6XHV0000C0212ZAD UNAS GOOD 230 READY 5000c50020c66c9c 2K 0006 9WKO8EB40000C0280TTS 2 GOOD 124 NORM 5000c50020caf780 2K 0006 9WKO71T70000C035HZX5 UNAS GOOD 194 READY 5000c500104f73ac 2K 0006 9WKO7RN20000C0372K9N UNAS GOOD 146 READY 5000050020cb0414 2K 0006 9WK0817D0000C0372KB9 UNAS GOOD 200 READY 5000c50020cb2388 2K 0006 9WKO5P0G0000C0317LG8 2 GOOD 137 NORM 5000c500104c7600 25 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6WNGO000C0365LAD UNAS GOOD 145 READY 5000c50020c61504 26 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0695L0000C031ANA4 UNAS GOOD 210 READY 50000500104ebf98 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 1 7 1 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 i i 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 27 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8HTLO000C032AYSB UNAS GOOD 208 READY 5000c50020cbl6ac 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 i 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 i 7 1 7 1 7 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 10 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 11 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 931 12 SEAGATE ST31000424SS SAS 93
115. L NAME RAD STATE TIMEOUT SATAssure BACK MIRRORED AHEAD ReACT REDUID DURING PRIORITY VERIFY in CAHE CACHE ORI URING og en pool 0 RAID6 10 NONE z pool 1 RAIDS III a ql a a 4 q q poo RAIDS poor RAIDS pool 4 RAID I Pootsj RAIDS KK a4 a4 aa in iz ix ix 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 121 Storage Pools 4 6 4 Locate Storage Pools To locate the disks in a storage pool select Pools gt Locate Storage Pool At the Locate Pool screen Figure 140 select the storage pool that you want to locate The screen changes accordingly to show the pool s disks Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of those disks Figure 140 Locate Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS LOCATE POOLS I T E POOL CHUNK RAD gare FREE RAID TOTAL RAW no ARK r SATAssure PHYSICAL VIRTUAL WRITE MIRRORED fay ReACT NAME SZE KB CAP GB CAP GB an DISKS DISKS se SAGDE 0 pool O 128 RAIDS 21784 27360 21784 10 10 3 4 1 pool 1 256 RAD5 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 m p po 2 pool 2 64 RAIDS 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 S Ti ri 3 pool 3 32 RAID5 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 Fi Ei 4 pool 4 256 RADS 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 PA z Z Enclosure 3 Pool pool 0 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 4 6 5 Delete a Storage Pool If you need to delete a storage pool select Pools gt Delete Storag
116. N CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xi Preface Preface What is in this guide This user guide contains comprehensive information regarding features and functions of the DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E system It also gives you step by step instructions on how to install and configure the system Information given in this user guide applies to both the SFA10000 and SFA10000E systems unless otherwise stated Related Documentation e SFA OS CLUI Command Reference e SFA10000 Quick Start Guide e SFA10000 Release Notes e StorageScaler 6000 User Guide StorageScaler 7000 User Guide StorageScaler 2460 User Guide e 42U 45U Rack Installation and Service Guide SFA10000 White Paper e SFA OS Service Manual International Standards The SFA10000 complies with the requirements of the following agencies and standards e CE e UL e CUL e C Tick e FCC Potential for Radio Frequency Interference USA Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and us
117. NE 0000 RUNNING REMOTE 7 28 Sf F NONE controller Event logs from controller A a SEQ DATE SEVERITY COMPO NUM TIME LOGID NENT MESSAGE 004384 ee 20 20 30 1714589 Information LOG REOPEN START SESSION LOG Open a new session 2011 04 SYNCLOG CONTROLLER SYNCHRONIZE LOG COMPLETED 004383 20 20 30 0788793 Inf LOG ST Mi SYNC LOG COMP STATE 21 ER EERSTE STATUS STS JS GBL SUCCESS 004282 ne 20 20 30 0788727 Information LOG_REOPEN LOG Closing current session and start new session 004281 a paa 20 20 05 9419810 Information LOG REOPEN START SESSION LOG Open a new session 004280 FARS 20 20 05 8915359 Information LOG REOPEN LOG Closing current session and start new session 004379 201104 19 20 24 9045631 LOG ES POWER SUPPLY UNSUFFORTED ES Bani es LON NON pose e et or Derg sr 21 number is not supported in this enclosure type x DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 114 Physical Disks Menu 4 4 Physical Disks Menu Figure 127 shows the Physical Disks pull down menu Figure 127 Physical Disks Menu Physical Disks Assign to Pool Clear Failed Locate Disks Remove From Spare Pool Set Failed Show Failed Disks Show Physical Disks Status Of Disk Firmware Update Update Disk Firmware 4 4 1 Show List of Physical Disks The Show All Physical Disks function displays the list of disks that are installed in the system Figure 128 Click on the disk to display its detailed information NOTE Ifthe disks ar
118. NTROLLER lt idx gt command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel 6 Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt idx gt command where lt idx gt is index of the controller which was determined in Step 5 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller 7 Physically replace the failing DEM 8 Start the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually pools will fail back to the controller that was started 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 151 dd 96 00259 001 Rev C Disk Enclosure Component Failures SAS Cable Replacement The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing cable 1 Physically locate the cable that needs to be replaced This is usually done by physically inspecting the cables or by noting that one of the green SAS link LEDs on an I O module IOM is not lit Identify the IOM that is associated with the failing cable This is done by physically following the cable to an IOM Identify the physical controller associated with this IOM Follow the cable connected to this IOM back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the o
119. O ICR IR RK Rk kk kk Fraction Idx Type Target Sub State Complete Priority Status Time 0 FULL REBUILD POOL 0 PD 135 RUNNING 53 80 NA 1 VERIFY ONCE POOL 1 NA RUNNING 0 99 NA 2 VERIFY ONCE POOL 2 NA RUNNING 0 99 NA Total Background Jobs 3 To display the details of a job Figure 94 enter command SHOW JOB lt job idx gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 94 Show Job Example Screen 2 FIR IR ea RO ICR Ak ae dk Background Jobs ig FOI II RR RR RK Rk kk kk kk OID 0x2b220000 Index 0 Target POOL 0x199b0000 Index 0 Sub Target PD 0x21310087 Index 135 Type REBUILD State RUNNING Completion Status UNKNOWN Priority 80 Fraction Complete 52 Time NA You may specify the amount of system resources that should be devoted to a background job The higher its priority value the faster the background job will run and the more the background job will impact client I O performance To set the job priority enter the command SET JOB lt id gt PRIORITY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is anumber between 1 and 99 Note that PRIORITY is not a percentage or a mathematical fraction of the available resources For example two background jobs with priority values of 50 will not use 100 of the system resources The SFA10000 may or may not limit the number of background jobs to keep the total of their priorities below 100 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User G
120. OFF ON ON ON 12 1 2 12 fo 00000 00000 a mm 3 Verify that the power switches on all the power distribution units PDUs are set to OFF DIP Switches 4 Connect the PDUs to your AC power source For maximum redundancy connect the PDUs to different AC circuits 2 6 Powering On the System 1 Switch on all the PDUs 2 Switch on the power supply modules on all the disk enclosures 3 On both UPS units press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds on the front panel to turn on the units Figure 36 Figure 36 UPS Front Panel Power Button Load Segment 1 LED Power OK LED 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 32 Powering On the System 4 Verify that the Power OK LED on both UPS units turns green and the Load Segment 1 LED turns yellow Figure 36 indicating a successful power application 5 Verify that the Power indicator on both controllers turns green Figure 37 If not press the Power button once 6 Verify that the Fault LED on both controllers is off Figure 37 Figure 37 Controller Front Panel LEDs Power Button Indicator Fault LED ro OBBEHOG You may now configure the system as described in Section 2 7 Configuring the SFA10000 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 33
121. OOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES To display the list of disks in a spare pool Figure 56 use the command SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISKS 6 Assign spare pools to storage pools Enter the command Figure 56 Show Spare Pool Example Screen 2 RAIDS show spare pool 6 all attributes 6 Index OID 0x19bc0006 Type GLOBAL SPARE Name spare pool l Block Size 512 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Total Capacity 120 GB UUID 0x0000000000000000 Total Phy Disks 1 Storage Pool List Total Spare Pools 1 RAIDS show spare pool 6 physical disks Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Pool State Idx State WWN 2 53 HITACHL 3 i 4 Ste SKEE ae 6 SPARE 648 NORM SET POOL lt pool id gt SPARE POOL lt spare pool id gt where lt pool id gt and lt spare pool id gt are the index names of the storage pool and spare pool respectively Repeat this step for each storage pool Figure 57 Figure 57 Set Storage Pool to Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 set pool 0 spare pool 6 POOL 0 OID 0x19b40000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If a storage pool s attributes show Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED no spare pool will serve this storage pool Use the SHOW POOL command to view the new storage pool information Figure 58 Figure 58 Show Pool Example Screen RAIDS show pool 1 all Index
122. ORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO Total Storage Pools 5 NOTE If you issue the command SHOW POOLS and the pools indicate there is a fault check the details of the pool The pool will go into WR thru state on initial startup to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The WR Thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in WR Thru mode until the issue is resolved The SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command displays the detailed information of the specified storage pool Figure 74 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 57 Storage Pool Management Figure 74 Show Storage Pool Attributes Example Screen kokk kokk Pool s ig KKR IOI ICR ok kokk Index 0 OID 0x1c790000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 Free Raid6 Capacity 21784 GB Max VD Size 21784 GB Total Capacity 27360 GB UUID 60001 08025a000000000001c790000 Global Spare Pool 0x18d60013 Index 19 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Init Policy ALLOW_IO Init Priority 50 Verify Priority 70 Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC Verify Policy ENABLED Assign Policy Device Type NA Rotation Speed NA Raw Capacity 2794 G
123. PDATE to save the changes Figure 153 Set Spare Pool Attributes Screen SPARE POOLS SET SPARE POOL ATTRIBUTES STEP 2 SET ATTRIBUTES INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare_pool 3 2 10 1808 9 spare_pool 9 3 10 2712 SET SPARE POOL ATTRIBUTES Set attributes for spare_pool 3 spare pool Spare pool name spare pool 3 Disk timeout fio minutes 4 8 6 Delete a Spare Pool In you need to delete a spare pool select Pools gt Delete Spare Pool At the Delete Spare Pool screen Figure 154 select the spare pool you want to delete Click DELETE SPARE POOLS You will be prompted to confirm deletion Click OK to proceed or CANCEL to cancel operation Figure 154 Delete Set Spare Pool Screen SPARE POOLS DELETE SPARE POOL INDEX SELECT SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 22 Vv spare_pool 22 3 10 5472 Message from webpage ey Are you sure you wantto delete selected spare pools cencet 4 8 7 Delete a Disk from Spare Pool If you need to remove a disk from a spare pool refer to Section 4 4 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool on page 116 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 129 Presentations 4 9 Presentations NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access A Presentation on
124. RD PARTY PATENTS COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS OR OTHER RIGHTS COPYRIGHT HOLDERS WILL BEAR NO LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION The name and trademarks of copyright holders may NOT be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to the software without specific written prior permission Title to copyright in this software and any associated documentation will at all times remain with copyright holders See the file AUTHORS which should have accompanied this software for a list of all copyright holders This file may be derived from previously copyrighted software This copyright applies only to those changes made by the copyright holders listed in the AUTHORS file The rest of this file is covered by the copyright notices if any listed below Copyright c 1992 1996 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose without fee and without written agreement is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA
125. Replacing the Battery Pack NOTE Do not disconnect the battery pack while the UPS is in Battery mode CAUTION If there is a power outage while replacing the battery pack the controller without its battery pack will power down However the redundant controller insures that no operations are lost or corrupted For this reason when you change the battery pack on one controller let it charge completely before changing the battery pack on the other controller With the hot swappable battery feature the UPS battery packs can be replaced without turning the UPS off or disconnecting the load Note that the battery packs are the FRU not the batteries If you prefer to shut down the UPS to change the battery pack use the CLUI to issue a SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL to the corresponding controller This will cause an orderly controller shutdown which concludes by automatically turning off the UPS power 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 143 UPS Maintenance WARNING Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from high short circuit current The following precautions should be observed 1 Remove watches rings or other metal objects 2 Use tools with insulated handles 3 Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries ELECTRIC ENERGY HAZARD Do not attempt to alter any battery pack wiring or connectors Attempting to alter wiring can cause injury Repla
126. S6000 disk enclosures Figure 28 Ten SS6000 disk enclosures en nS eee ee ee nn ee ee ee ee ee ee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 22 Cable Connections Figure 23 Connecting SFA10000 Controllers to 5 x SS6000 Enclosures or 5 x SS7000 Enclosures Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 I O Module A 1 O Module 002 022 001 122 101 Disk Enclosure 3 I O Module 012 032 011 Disk Enclosure 4 1 70 Module 010 030 041 Disk Enclosure 5 I O Module 040 042 003 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 23 Cable Connections Figure 24 Connecting SFA10000 Controllers to 10 x SS6000 Enclosures or 10 x SS7000 Enclosures Controller 0
127. SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 38 Configuring the SFA10000 2 To verify the new settings enter the command Figure 45 UI SHOW NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL Figure 45 Show Network Interface Settings RAID 0 ui show network interface local Network device id 0 address 192 168 0 10 netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 0 1 3 Switch the serial cable to the RS 232 port on second controller and repeat the above steps to enter a different IP address for second controller At this point you should be able to use the SFA OS CLUI and GUI via the network If you want to set up email and SNMP event notification refer to Section 3 13 5 Email and SNMP Notification Setup on page 102 for information 2 7 8 Access Virtual Machines SFA10000E Only The SFA10000E is shipped with Virtual Machines VM preconfigured and installed for serving your ExaScaler or GridScaler file system NOTE By default each ExaScaler system is shipped with three VMs enabled and a GridScaler system is shipped with four VMs enabled The Virtual Machines can be accessed in one of two ways e VNC You can use a VNC viewer to connect to a VM console Use the IP address followed by a colon then followed by a single digit in the range 0 3 The last digit represents the VM you wish to connect to For example if the IP address of the controller is 192 168 0 1 and you want to connect to the first VM use a VNC connection address of 19
128. SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM RESTART to reboot the controllers Figure 39 Show Physical Disk Status RAID 0 show pd Health State Idx State 1 1 HITACHI GOOD 6 NORM J 2 HITACHI GOOD 1 NORM iiii 1 3 HITACHI GOOD 5 NORM tur is 5 Q EA un o 9 lt fo 5 Q ej 5 Total Physical Disks 300 Total Assigned Disks 0 Total Unassigned Disks 300 Total SAS Disks 300 Total Member State Normal 300 3 Enter SHOW FAN Verify that no fan faults are found 4 Enter SHOW POWER Verify that the AC Fail and DC Fail states are false 5 Enter SHOW TEMPERATURE Verify that all the temperature sensors do not report over temperature conditions 6 Enter SHOW UPS ALL Verify that the UPS batteries are healthy Figure 40 Also take note of the charge level as the battery may take several hours to fully charge Verify that the UPS firmware versions match the measured voltages noted down in Section 2 2 5 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification If these are incorrect then have a DDN field engineer correct them If either voltage X G or voltage Y G is less than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 Ifboth voltages X G and Y G are greater than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 83 74 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 36 Configuring the SFA10000 Figu
129. SSIGNED POOL FAILED ALL command to display the failed disk s information Figure 72 Figure 72 Show Failed Disk Example Screen FO RR k Physical Disk s SSS Index 139 OID 0x2135008b Pool Index UNASSIGNED Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 1824 GB Raw Capacity 1863 GB Base 2 2000 GB Base 10 Block Size 512 Enabled Disk Ch 0x2b4 Oxdl Enclosure Index 1 Enclosure OID 0x50000001 Disk Slot 1 Li Vendor ID SEAGATE Product ID ST3200044455 Product Revision 0006 Serial Number 9WMODRNO0000C0331WFJ Health State FAILED Rotation Speed 7200 RPM Device Type SAS Member State UNASSIGNED State READY Spare FALSE Failed TRUE UUID 0x5000c50010444e40 Update in Progress FALSE Disk States Listed below are the possible disk states GOOD Disk is in a normal or functional condition AMIS Disk is Already MISsing The disk in this state must return prior to the other disks If the specific disk that is in this state never returns to the pool the pool will remain inoperative Replacing this disk to do rebuild will do nothing DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 55 Physical Disk Information WTRB Disk is Waiting To ReBuild A disk went missing then came back and is rebuilding either partial or full Then other disks in the storage pool went missing causing it to go inoperative which halts the rebuild Now waiting for other disks in the system to be
130. STRIPE WRITE CACHING TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt MIRRORED TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt READ AHEAD CACHING TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt WRITE BACK CACHING TRUE FALSE NOTE Turning off mirroring may result in data integrity issues 3 10 1 1 Cache Protection The SFA10000 UPS serves as a battery which allows the controller to flush the contents of cache to non volatile storage internal disk during a power event When cache has been completely flushed the controller will shut itself down When power is restored the flushed cache is replayed back from the non volatile storage and committed to disk Mirrored Write Back Cache MWBC provides a mechanism of cache protection by copying or mirroring the contents of cache from one singlet to the peer singlet and vice versa In the event of a singlet failure the copy of cache sitting in the surviving peer can be committed to disk by the surviving peer Although there is a latency involved in the cache mirroring process it is recommended as additional protection of data 3 10 2 Single Controller Write Back Cache Policy The SFA10000 can be set to automatically switch to write thru mode upon loss of one of the controllers in the couplet configuration Loss of a controller is defined as a controller shutting down for any reason such as crash normal shutdown and hardware failure To change the settings enter the command SET SUBSYSTEM WRITE BACK DISABLE TRUE F
131. Setting date time while in NTP mode e Once the Clock code has finished calibration 100 seconds NTP will be started Both controllers will have the same NTP settings and so presumably will have synchronized time once NTP sets the time e Issuing anew SET SUBSYSTEM NTP command with a new set of IP addresses will stop and restart NTP 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 78 Network Time Protocol Mode e If NTP finds a time difference of more than 128 msec it will jump the time to the correct time This will result in a discontinuity in the event log logdisk syslog and anywhere that records a timestamp e NTP will always set the controllers to UTC Coordinated Universal Time There is no option to set time zones or otherwise change the offset from UTC When not in NTP mode e The master controller uses its time to set the time on the other controller The SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command is used to set the time of both controllers together The system records time using the military method which records hours from 00 to 24 not in a m and p m increments of 1 to 12 Settings are automatically adjusted for leap years To change the system date and time to March 1 2010 2 15 32 pm for example type SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME 2010 3 1 14 15 32 e Once the time is set the time on the two controllers is free to drift independent of the other controller 96 00259
132. Storage Fusion Architecture SFA10000 10000E SFA OS Version 1 4 0 User Guide Important Information Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of DataDirect Networks Inc No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the written permission of DataDirect Networks Inc 2011 DataDirect Networks Inc All rights reserved DataDirect Networks the DataDirect Networks logo Silicon Storage Architecture S2A Web Object Scaler and Storage Fusion Architecture are trademarks of DataDirect Networks Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective holders DataDirect Networks Licensor s makes no warranties express or implied including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose regarding the software DataDirect Networks Licensor s does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software in terms of its correctness accuracy reliability currentness or otherwise The entire risk as to the results and performance of the software is assumed by you The exclusion of implied warranties is not permitted by some jurisdictions The above exclusion may not apply to you
133. TEM followed by power cycling the enclosure This is also required to recover from an UPDATE ENCLOSURE failure These power cycles are required The UPDATE PD command starts a background operation so that the CLUI is free to do other operations during the UPDATE The status that comes back from the UPDATE PD command only indicates whether the background operation was successfully started SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS should be used immediately after the command and then subsequently r periodically to check the status of the UPDATE e When you SCP the Consolidated Download File DDN to the firmware directory it must be copied to the PRIMARY controller Since the PRIMARY may change it is probably best to copy it to BOTH controllers If SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS reports status JS_ES_PD_DL_UCODE_OPEN_FAILED for a physical disk the most likely cause is that the file was not copied to the PRIMARY controller Online physical disk firmware update is not currently supported Therefore make sure that there are no rebuilds initializations or host IO operations being done during the UPDATE PD operation This is enforced by making sure the user has issued the SET SUBSYSTEM OFFLINE command before allowing an UPDATE PD command In order to cause the new physical disk firmware to start being used you must power cycle the enclosure in which the physical disk is installed In the SFA10000 it is best to do this by doing a SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM f
134. TRIBUTES command It will display the type of job and the percentage of completion Figure 65 Figure 65 Show Job Example Screen RAID 0 show job all attributes Priority Fraction Complete 50 71 OID 0x2e040001 Index 1 Target POOL 0x1aa00001 Index 1 Sub Target NA Type INITIALIZE State RUNNING Completion Status UNKNOWN Time NA You may also check if a virtual disk is ready for access using the SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 66 Figure 66 Show Virtual Disk Example Screen RAID 0 show virtual disk 0 all attributes OID 0x8 9ba0000 Name 89ba0000 POOL OID 0x19b40003 Capacity 16384 MBs Offset 0x0 C State READY D Raidlevel RAIDS IO ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MWBC FALSE Initializing FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Data Lost FALSE Present Home Only FALSE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 49 Chapter 3 Administration 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 50 Managing the SFA10000 3 1 Managing the SFA10000 The SFA OS provides a set of tools that enable administrators to centrally manage the network storage and resources that handle business critical data These include Configuration Management Performance Management and Firmware Update Management NOTE Thecommand descriptions given in this User Gui
135. TWORKS BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY USER FOR ANY DAMAGES EXPENSES LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY COSTS OF RECOVERING REPROGRAMMING OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE PRODUCTS OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE DATADIRECT NETWORKS PRODUCTS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide iii Important Information GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guara
136. VE 1 vd 1 0 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 270 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI I E Lan 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 371 READY 1 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE e SHOW VD 3 ALL command under failed initialization conditions Index 0 OID 0x8a680000 Name vd 0_0 Pool Index 0 Pool OID 0x1a520000 Capacity 472 GB Offset 0x0 State FAILED INITIALIZATION Raidlevel RAID6 IO ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MIRRORED TRUE Initializing FAILED Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE 3 3 4 SATAssure You may enable SATAssure for a storage pool To display the current setting enter the command Figure 77 SHOW POOL lt pool id gt ALL_ATTRIBUTES Figure 77 Show Storage Pool Details Example Screen TORR KR RR KK ie Pool s ig kokk KKR RR KR Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Assign Policy Device Type SAS Rotation Speed NA Raw Capacity 136 GB C SATAssure NONE 2 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 61 Storage Pool Management To enable SATAssure enter the command SET POOL lt pool id gt SATASSURE PARITY DATA_ INTEGRITY FIELD where PARITY is the parity check on read option and DATA_INTEGRITY_FIELD is the integrity field option To disable SATAssure enter the command SET POOL lt pool id gt SATASSURE NONE NOTE When the SATAssure setting is changed from PARITY to a different setting an initialization job is started automatically an
137. a few minutes the controller can overheat causing power failure and data loss Such use will invalidate the warranty If the controller is powered up and you remove any module replace it Warning controller components Avoid contact with backplane components and 1 Observe all conventional ESD precautions when handling the Warning module connectors DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 146 Controller Component Failures 5 6 1 Replacing a Power Supply Module If a controller power supply fails the Enclosure Fault LED on the front panel will turn amber and the green LED on the failed power supply will be off You can also determine if a power supply has failed using the CLUI command SHOW POWER The position of the failed power supply should match the label PSU1 or PSU2 on the back of the controller If the power supply has failed you must replace it Once you remove it you must replace it within 5 minutes to prevent the system from over heating NOTE Obtain a replacement module of the same type before removing any faulty module Follow these steps to replace a power supply module 1 Identify the failed power supply 2 Disconnect its power cord 3 Loosen the module s thumbscrew and then slide the module out of the bay Figure 174 Figure 174 Controller Power Supply Module Removal Power Supply 1 4 Slide the replacement module into the bay making sure that it
138. age prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you ag
139. aging the SFA10000 cm User Logins RS 232 Login For a terminal session press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Login via SSH For a SSH session Figure 68 enter the user name user and password user Both are case sensitive Figure 68 SSH Login Screen login as user user 10 23 23 16 s password Linux none 2 6 25 ddn 016620 3 2 SMP Mon Aug 16 10 38 29 MST 2010 x DataDirect Networks SFA Logout To logout enter the command QUIT For SSH connection the current session will be disconnected 313 Available Commands The SFA OS CLUI commands are independent of case Most of the keywords can be abbreviated and most of the punctuations are optional Entering the character at the CLUI prompt will display the available commands within the CLUI Figure 69 To get help information on a command type the command followed by a question mark For example ASSIGN lt Enter gt will display help on assign options on the system Figure 69 Help Screen RAID 0 Select one of the following subjects for additional commands APPLICATION Selects the application processor as the subject RAID Selects the raid processor as the subject UL Selects the user interface as the subject Additional commands HELP Provides information on how to use the user interface help QUIT Exits the Command Line User Interface Object class options availabl
140. airflow and cooling a disk module or a dummy disk module must be installed in every slot of the enclosure 1 Press the handle release button on the disk module to release the handle Figure 182 Figure 182 Disk Module Handle Release Button Lever Release Button 2 Hold the disk module so that the LEDs are on the bottom and the handle is fully open 3 Slide the disk module into the slot until the handle starts to close Figure 183 Figure 183 Insert Disk Module into Disk Slot 4 Gently push the handle down to cam the module home You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed Figure 184 Figure 184 Close Handle on Disk Module 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 159 S56000 Disk Maps for SFA10000E The charts below illustrate the disk maps for proper placement in the SS6000 disk enclosures when used with the SFA10000E Disk Enclosure 1 Top i osure 6 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack Disk Enclosure 2 Disk Enclosure 7 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack A Disk Enclosure 3 Disk Enclosure 8 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 A Front
141. and SET SUBSYSTEM NTP lt ip address list up to 4 gt NONE Examples SET SUBSYSTEM NTP 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 3 4 5 6 6 5 7 8 SET SUBSYSTEM NTP 1 2 3 4 SET SUBSYSTEM NTP NONE Specifying a list of NTP addresses will start the NTP mode on each controller using that list of NTP addresses as the time servers Specifying NONE will turn off NTP mode To display the current settings enter the command Figure 88 SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 88 Show NTP Settings RAID 0 show subsystem all JRO IR A KK s Subsystem eg KR KKR RR III AO kk RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60001 0800a30000000000030000000 Subsystem Time Fri Apr 22 06 26 39 2011 Locate Dwell Time 120 seconds Enabled Licenses RAID6 SATASSURE Fast Timeout ON Pool Verify Priority 10 NTP Mode ON 10 32 16 24 10 32 16 25 Drive Error Tolerance HIGH Single Controller WB ENABLED Fri Apr 22 06 26 39 2011 When in NTP mode e The time is set between the two controllers under the following conditions when the controllers boot and discover each other whena SET SUBSYSTEM command is issued whether it is setting the time or not e Each controller will attempt to synchronize with the specified NTP servers If none of the servers are valid the time on each controller is free to drift independent of any other time source and independent of the other controller The SET SUBSYSTEM DATA AND TIME command will fail with a status of
142. anges accordingly showing the disk locations for that pool Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of those disks Figure 149 Locate Spare Pool ISTORAGE POOLS LOCATE SPARE POOLS INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare pool 3 3 10 2712 9 spare pool 9 3 10 2712 Enclosure 1 Pool spare pool 3 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 4 8 3 Create a Spare Pool To create a spare pool select Pools gt Create Spare Pool At the Create Spare Pool screen Figure 150 select the drive size spindle speed and drive type for the pool Figure 150 Create Spare Pool SPARE POOLS CREATE SPARE POOL SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB spare_pool 3 2 10 1808 Select drive size DONT CARE Select spindle Speed DONT CARE FJ Select drive type DONT CARE Click NEXT to bring up the Create Pool Advanced screen Figure 151 Check to select the disks to add to the pool to be created Click CREATE SPARE POOL to create the pool NOTE When assigning disk drives to a spare pool that is to be assigned to a given storage pool be sure to select a disk that is as large or larger than any disks in the assigned storage pool 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 127 Spare Pools Figure 151 Select Disks for Spare Pool STORAGE POOLS CREATE SPARE POOL ADVANCED
143. are already installed in the rack s if you ordered the controllers and disk enclosures with the racks Refer to the DDN 42U 45U Rack Installation and Service Guide for detailed instructions on removing the rack from the shipping crate and positioning the rack Refer to Appendix E Rack Installation Procedure if you need instructions on how to install a SFA10000 controller or UPS unit into a rack 2 3 1 Packing List The SFA10000 ships with the following e Installed in the rack s Two controllers Two UPS units Four l meter Ethernet ICL cables Two 1 meter InfiniBand ICL cables Two USB cables Forty SAS cables Five ten or twenty disk enclosures Disk modules e Two serial cables e Two Ethernet cables SFA10000 Quick Start Guide SFA10000 User Guide 42U 45U Rack Installation and Service Guide SFA OS CLUI Command Reference Release Notes 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 19 2 4 Installing the Disk Modules Installing the Disk Modules The disk modules are shipped separately from the disk enclosures The SFA10000E disk modules have been pre labeled with a slot number Use the charts in Appendix C to determine proper drive placement according to the slot number on the label For SFA10000 configurations create a more balanced load by evenly distribute the disk modules among the disk enclosures If a mixture of disk technologies such as SAS and SATA wi
144. c operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this
145. can disable all channels enable all channels or enable one channel at a time through the CLUI If you wish to have two channels enabled use the following commands APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 0 APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 2 Channel 0 is CORPO Channel 1 is CORP1 These are the two RAID processors on controller 0 Channel 2 is C1RP0 Channel 3 is C1RP1 These are the two RAID processors on controller 1 If you have an existing storage configuration running Windows Linux presentations and you wish to ADD a VD presentation for MAC e You will have to sustain a storage outage now so that you can disable all VD presentations thru any channel and Re enable the appropriate channels one at a time that will be serving VDs to the Windows Linux hosts You will then set up the appropriate channel s that will operate in MAC mode e At this point you can restart the storage subsystem proceed in creating your MAC VD presentations and enable them through their separate channels 3 6 5 Configure Presentations of Virtual Disks to Hosts NOTE If you are configuring a storage subsystem with any MAC OSx presentations it is absolutely required that you read and understand Section 3 6 4 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts prior to actually doing your configuration There are three objects relationships that must be properly established in order to create a presentati
146. ce the battery pack with the same type of battery pack as originally installed in the UPS Perform the following steps to replace the battery pack NOTE Replace the battery pack every 24 months even if it is still functioning 1 Remove the UPS bezel by loosening the right side and then tapping the right side to disengage the left side Figure 169 Figure 169 Removing the UPS Bezel Z am a i 2 Arre i 2 Disconnect the battery pack connector Figure 170 Figure 170 Disconnecting the Battery Pack Connector 3 Slide the battery pack cover to the right and pull it off Figure 171 Set aside the battery pack cover Figure 171 Removing the Battery Pack Cover 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 144 UPS Maintenance 4 Pull the battery pack out and place it on a flat stable surface Figure 172 CAUTION Note that the battery pack weighs 20 pounds Be sure to support the battery pack as you pull it out of the UPS Figure 172 Pulling Out the Battery Pack 5 Slide the new battery pack into the UPS 6 Reinstall the battery pack cover 7 Connect the battery pack connector 8 Reinstall the UPS bezel 9 Ifyou shut down the controller to change the battery pack restart the controller now 39 31 Testing Batteries NOTE Itisrecommended that the battery pack be charged for 6 to 24 hours before testing Press and hold
147. chnical support contacting 178 Telnet 101 terminology 173 time set system 78 U unassigned location physical 56 unassigned pool 54 UPS 12 battery pack replace 142 battery connect 31 Index connect to controller 31 DIP switch 32 test batteries 145 v verify pool 62 version information 89 virtual disk assign to host 71 associated with storage pool view 59 counters 84 create 42 64 delete 64 name change 64 status checking 63 visual indication disk 56 storage pool 62 unassigned pool 56 w wedged disk troubleshoot 141 write back cache set 83 LZ zoning configuration disk enclosure 161 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 177 Contacting Technical Support amp Shipping Instructions You can contact DataDirect Networks Technical Support by Telephone at 1 888 634 2374 North America 1 818 718 8507 International Internet email at support ddn com Technical Support is available Monday through Friday After hours support is available to those customers that have a Service Contract Please contact our sales representatives for more information You can find us on the World Wide Web at www ddn com You can contact our Customer Service by Telephone at 1 818 700 6052 Internet email at customerservice ddn com Our Corporate Headquarters is located at 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth California 91311 1 800 TERABYTE 1 800 837 2298 Product Shipping Instruct
148. come active again MNRB Disk is Missing with No ReBuild This is the same as missing but when the disk comes back there is nothing to rebuild This could happen when multiple disks fail at the same time making the storage pool inoperative Reseating is an option here to see if the disk would come back This is similar to the AMIS condition but in this case it does not matter what order the MNRB disks become active MISS Disk is MISSing This is either not electrically active or seen or only one controller sees it in a couplet system Reseating would be a first recommendation as a partial rebuild would happen if it then appears to both controllers Replacing would cause a full rebuild FAIL Disk is FAILed and is unassigned This means that the disk timeout has either expired or the disk had errors and had been failed FAIL in the storage pool command means that it has been failed out of the storage pool not necessarily the state of the disk This is being renamed to EMPTY RBLD Disk is ReBuiLDing PRTRDY PaRTial ReaDY This state is a condition where only one of the two controllers is able to communicate with a drive 3 2 3 Visual Indication LOCATE PHYSICAL DISK lt id gt provides a visual indication of the specified disk The status LED of the disk module will blink LOCATE UNASSIGNED POOL provides a visual indication of the disk modules that are unassigned The status LED of the disk modules will blink LOCATE UNASSI
149. command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel 5 Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt idx gt command where lt idx gt is index of the controller which was determined in Step 4 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller 6 Physically replace the failing IOM 7 Start the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually pools will fail back to the controller that was started 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 150 Disk Enclosure Component Failures om DEM Replacement on SS6000 Please refer to the DDN SS6000 User Guide if you need detailed instructions on how to physically replace a DEM The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing DEM 1 Identify the DEM that needs to be replaced The need for a DEM replacement may have come from an event in an event log the results of a SHOW command an SNMP trap or an email message The event SNMP trap and email message include the element index within its enclosure and the enclosure WWN the outputs of SHOW ENCLOSURE and SHOW EXPANDER have the same information Use these and the SHOW ENCLOSURE command to find the OIDEX of the DEM s enclosure Note that the DEMs in each SS6000 enclosure have expander indexes 3 through 10 indexes 1 and 2 are the I O modules IOM 2 P
150. condition LOG ES EXPANDER ELEMENT REMOVED A DEM or an I O module has been removed LOG ES EXPANDER ELEMENT WARNING The DEM reports normal LOG ES POWER SUPPLY INSERTED A power supply has been inserted LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_NORMAL The power supply has returned to a normal status LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_REMOVED A power supply has been removed LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_WARNING Power supply for the controller issued warning LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_INSERTED A temperature sensor located in the power supply has been inserted LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_NORMAL A temperature sensor located in the power supply has returned to normal status LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_REMOVED A temperature sensor located in the power supply has been removed LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_WARNING A temperature sensor in the enclosure has reported a warning condition LOG_ES_UPS_CLIENT_IS_RESPONSIVE Controller enclosure UPS is responsive LOG RAID UNCORRECTED MEDIUM ERR Aphysical device medium error could not be corrected due to lack of pool redundancy LOG RAID UNCORRECTED SILENT ERR A SATAssure error silent error could not be corrected due to lack of pool redundancy DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 104 96 00259 001 Rev C Table 4 SNMP Only Events Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP ONLY Events Error
151. ctly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide vii Important Information You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 Howeve
152. d all users logged out before using this command The SFA10000 will halt all I O requests and save the data to the disks The system can be safely turned off after using this command Use the Power button on the UPS unit to turn off power to the controller Once shut down is complete all power supplies must be switched off or unplugged Use the Power button on the UPS unit to remove power to the controller Power must be removed from the system for at least 10 seconds before it will start up again For SFA10000E the Virtual Machines are automatically shut down whenever the SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM command is issued 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 82 Performance Management 3 10 Performance Management 3 10 1 Cache Coherency By default the SFA10000 runs in couplet mode where both controllers are running simultaneously communicating through internal Ethernet and InfiniBand connections This means that the SFA10000 is always running with cache coherency enabled The cache settings are configurable for each storage pool Available keywords are FULL STRIPE WRITE CACHINGSpecify full stripe write caching MIRROREDSpecify cache data mirroring READ AHEAD CACHINGSpecify read ahead caching WRITE BACK CACHING Specify write back caching To display the current settings enter the command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES To change the settings use these commands SET POOL lt id gt FULL
153. d from the transaction journal implemented within the write back cache when power is restored This journal is mirrored so that when a simultaneous power failure and controller hardware failure occurs the surviving controller can recover the transactions e Storage Metadata Mirrored n Ways SFA OS stores a copy of storage system metadata on 18 physical disks to minimize the likelihood that its metadata is lost or corrupted Partial Rebuild This feature reduces rebuild times by updating only the data that has changed while the disk was down The SFA OS tracks the changes made to a RAID set when a member physical disk becomes unavailable If that member becomes available again within a user definable timeout then only the stripes that were modified while the member was missing are rebuilt This minimizes the mean time to repair for the RAID set and thus limits any performance impact of a disk repair e Hot Swappable and Redundant Components Adhering to enterprise RAS standard almost all hardware components such as physical disks power supply modules and fan module are redundant and hot swappable Hot Spares The SFA OS provides pools of spare physical disks that can be automatically used to replace failed physical disks By replacing a failed RAID set member automatically the mean time to repair for the RAID set is minimized resulting in improved data reliability e Management Options via RS 232 and Ethernet SSH A RS 232 port and Ethe
154. d in Section 3 13 5 3 Inquiry Items and Events on page 103 detail the additional inquiry items and events that will be trapped in the SNMP MIB and in the Email Agent 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 112 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 Controllers Menu Controllers Menu Figure 121 shows the Controllers pull down menu Figure 121 Controllers Menu Controllers CLUI Interface Restart Controller Set Controller Attributes Show Controllers Show IOC Shutdown Controller Update Firmware View logs Show Controllers The Show Controllers function display the list of controllers installed in the system Figure 122 If a Manual Intervention Required condition is present click on the highlighted event to get detailed information Figure 122 Show All Controllers Screen CONTROLLERS SHOW ALL CONTROLLERS UP TIME RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOCAUREMOTE PRIMARY days CRASHDUMP NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE hhmm PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION syne 0 days other 0 A 13126962 0000 RUNNING REMOTE VER 7 7 NONE ret 1 B 43 1 26962 0000 RUNNING LOCAL ZZ 6 Vv Vv NONE ner 4 51 controller Set Controller Attributes To change the controller s attributes select Controllers gt Set Controller Attributes Figure 123 illustrates the Set Controller Attributes screen Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes
155. d password is Firmware Both user name and password are case sensitive 3 Select Login At the login screen Figure 101 use the user name admin with the password password to log into the system User name and passwords are care sensitive 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 90 Firmware Update Management Figure 101 Login Screen WinSCP Login Session Session Stored sessions Host name Environment Directories SSH Preferences Port number 10 32 31 240 2S User name Password firmware Private key file Protocol File protocol Allow SCP fallback Select color Advanced options About Languages Login Save Close 4 Find the image file and drag this to the destination window and select copy Copy operation commences To launch the update 1 Logintothe controller via an SSH session with the user name user and password user 2 Atthe CLI prompt enter update firmware controller lt controller id gt FILE lt file specification gt For example update firmware controller LOCAL FILE ddn flash 2812 opt tgz NOTE The quotes around the filename of the firmware image are required 3 Upon completion of reboot login and enter the command SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL Verify that the firmware version is correct NOTE The pools may indicate there is a fault Issue the command SHOW POOLS
156. d runs in the background 355 Verifying a Storage Pool Pool verification is a feature that goes with SATAssure It allows you to run a background job that finds and fixes parity issues when using the FORCE option It is also automatically initiated when SATAssure encounters an error in an attempt to fix the errors To set this mode use the command SET SUBSYSTEM VERIFY_POLICY lt 0 99 gt where the number range indicates the internal resources to use for the process Zero is used to turn the feature OFF any other number will turn the feature on To use the one time verify function use the command VERIFY POOL lt pool id gt FORCE_CONSISTENCY 336 Naming a Storage Pool The SET POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt name gt command lets you specify a name to identify the storage pool Figure 78 Figure 78 Set Pool Name Example Screen RAID 0 set pool 0 name RAID 5 Set POOL 0 OID 0x19b40000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 3 3 7 Deleting a Storage Pool The DELETE POOL lt id gt command deletes the specified storage pool from the system The DELETE POOL command erases all the data on the storage pool You cannot delete a storage pool if there are virtual disks still Warning Present on the pool 3 3 8 Locate a Storage Pool The LOCATE POOL lt id gt command provides a visual indication of the specified storage pool The status LED of the disk modules in the specified st
157. data protection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6 e Chunk Size The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the Storage Pool NOTE RAID 1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed e Disk Count A RAID 1 storage pool consists of 2 physical disks A RAID 5 Storage Pool may consist of 5 or 9 disks A RAID 6 Storage Pool may consist of 6 or 10 disks For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics such as SAS SATA capacity and RPM e Drive Type Drive types can be SAS or SATA e Drive Size Drive size is the capacity of the disk drive in GB Spindle Speed You may choose RPM 15000 10000 7200 5400 or SSD e SATAssure SATAssure technology is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity is always mentioned for all IO operations A license is required to run this feature 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 59 Storage Pool Management To create a storage pool enter the command CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL 1 5 6 CHUNK SIZE 32 64 128 256 ASSIGN_POLICY SAS SATA NUMBER 21516 9 10 or PHYSICAL DISK lt list of disks gt INIT ALLOW lt initialization policy gt SATASSURE NONE DATA INTEGRITY FIELD PARITY where lt initiali
158. de are specific to Firmware Version 1 4 0 To access the most up to date commands use the CLUI s Online Help feature 3 1 1 Management Interface SAN management information for the SFA10000 can be accessed locally through a serial interface or remotely through SSH Locally via Serial Interface Any RS 232 terminal or terminal emulator such as Hyperterminal can be used to configure and monitor the SFA10000 1 Connect the supplied serial cable to the RS 232 port on the controller Figure 67 Connect the other end of the cable to a serial port on a standard PC Figure 67 RS 232 Port on Controller Controller RS 232 2 Load a serial console program such as HyperTerminal minicom and screen and use the following settings for the serial connection Bits per second 115 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 3 Once connected press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Remotely via SSH To configure and monitor the SFA10000 remotely connect the system to your Ethernet network Please refer to Section 3 13 Remote Management of SFA10000 for further information on how to set up the controller s network interface 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 51 Man
159. ding paragraphs when dismantling and disposing of this equipment ESD Precautions CAUTION It is recommended that you check and fit a suitable anti static wrist or ankle strap and observe all conventional ESD precautions when handling the SFA10000 plug in modules and components Avoid contact with backplane components and module connectors 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xiv Preface Data Security Disk units are fragile Handle them with care and keep them away from strong magnetic fields ALL the supplied plug in modules and blanking plates must be in place for the air to flow correctly around the enclosure and also to complete the internal circuitry If the SFA10000 or disk enclosure is used with modules or dummy disk modules missing for more than a few minutes the system can overheat causing power failure and data loss Such use may also invalidate the warranty If you remove a drive module replace it immediately If it is faulty replace it with a drive module of the same type and capacity Ensure that all disk drives are removed from the enclosure before attempting to move the rack installation Do not abandon your backup routines No system is completely foolproof FEE ee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xv Table of Contents Preface Related Documentation 0 0 0 c cece cece cece eee eee eee e
160. disks Figure 134 Locate Unassigned Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS LOCATE UNASSIGNED POOL POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS TOTAL CAPACITY GB FAILED CAPACITY GB unassigned 8 8 Enclosure 1 Pool unassigned 53 54 41 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 118 4 6 4 6 1 96 00259 001 Rev C INDEX POOL NAMI Storage Pools Storage Pools Storage pool commands are located under the Pools pull down menu Figure 135 Figure 135 Pools Menu Pools Create Spare Pool Create Storage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delete Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool Verify Pools Clear Fault Show List of Storage Pools To display the list of existing storage pools select Pools gt Show Storage Pools The list of storage pools is displayed Figure 136 Click on the individual storage pool name to display its detailed information Figure 136 Storage Pool List STORAGE POOLS SHOW ALL POOLS CHUNK E SIZE KB RAID 64 pool 64 POOL OID Ox1db50010 Name Type Chunk Size Block Size Raidset type STATE 559 ae we TIMEOUT SATAssure PNG VETA VARE MIRRORED HER ReACT GB GB GB Min CACHE CACHE 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 s
161. do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or impor
162. e lt disk id gt is the index name of the disk to be added and lt pool id gt is the index name of the spare pool A message is displayed to indicate whether the disk has been added to the spare pool Figure 54 Figure 54 Assign Physical Disk to Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 assign physical disk 648 to_pool 6 PHYSICAL DISK 648 OID 0x22b10288 assigned to POOL 6 OID 0x19bc0006STATUS Success 0x0 To view the list of available disks enter the command SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL PHYSICAL DISK 3 Use the CREATE SPARE POOL and ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK commands to create more spare pools as needed If you need to delete a disk from the spare pool enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL 0x1800ffff To delete a spare pool enter the command DELETE SPARE POOL lt pool id gt 4 You may assign a name to a spare pool using the command SET SPARE lt spare pool id gt NAME lt name gt 5 To view the list of configured spare pool s enter the command SHOW SPARE POOL Figure 55 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 44 Figure 55 Show Spare Pool Example Screen 1 Configuring the SFA10000 RAIDS show spare pool Disk Total Total Storage Tdx Name Blocks T O Cap GB PDs Pool Idx 6 spare pool l 512 10 120 1 Total Spare Pools 1 To display the detailed information of a spare pool Figure 56 use the command SHOW SPARE P
163. e 1 073 741 824 bytes 220 bytes Host A persistent logical object that represents an abstract client for one or more Virtual Disk s and that is given access to data on those Virtual Disk s ICL Inter Controller Link Initiator A persistent logical object associated with a Host that represents a FCP or SRP initiator port on a Host s HBA KiB kibibyte A unit of digital information storage and denote 1 024 bytes 2 bytes MiB mebibyte A unit of digital information storage and denote 1 024 kibibytes 220 bytes 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 173 Physical Disk PD Pool Presentation RAIDset RP Singlet Spare Pool Storage Pool Unassigned Pool Virtual Disk VD 96 00259 001 Rev C Terminology A disk module SAS or SATA or solid state device SSD used by the system back end to store data and subsystem metadata A set of physical disks There are three types Storage Pool Spare Pool and Unassigned Pool A persistent logical object that describes an association between a Host and a Virtual Disk that specifies if a Host may access the Virtual Disk and any specific constraints for access A container formed by a set of Physical Disk extents and controlled by one of the RAID algorithms such as RAID6 RAID Processor Single Controller A set of physical disks that are used as spares in one or more storage pools A set of physical disk
164. e GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
165. e Pool asanenennananenenennnnenenenenennanenenenenene 127 48 3 CreateaSparePool asanenennnnanenenennnnanenenenennanenenenenene 127 48 4 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool aaanuunvnnvnvnnvrnvaneaneneenvene 128 4 8 5 Set Spare Pool Attributes rwvuananenennnnenenenenennaneneneneneer 129 48 6 DeleteaSparePool asananenuananenenennnnanenenenennanenenenenene 129 48 7 Delete a Disk from Spare Pool asanananennanenenenenennenenenenennen 129 AO Presentations oerion cscs in Siete tuts aes eieen esas Ma Ree AAR ARENSE DAREA 130 4 9 1 Presentation Menu cece cece eee een een e eee eee ee een ete enetenes 131 49 2 Show Presentations eccer erin carinei aana es a RA e ia 131 4 9 3 Set Up a Presentation 0 cece cece cece cence eee e eee tenet tenenes 131 4 9 3 1 Created Host inspirerer ea dames andawek ewan eld deig 131 4 9 3 2 Map Host to Discovered Initiators 0 c cee ee cence nent eeeeeeeeeeee 132 4 9 3 3 Present Virtual Disks to Hosts 0 00 cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeeneeeees 132 210 Enclosure MIEN junker eee kand de ae ken d d renere 133 4 10 1 Show Enclosures rwavananenenennaneneneneneananenenenennanenenenene 133 4 10 2 Update Enclosure Firmware wvuananenennenenenenenennenenenenennen 133 5 1 RAID O Prompt is not shown correctly cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeens 136 S BYENE LOG BBR ERE ESS lev nsrcenamcimesiin sauces agn geese ns blue wine da
166. e Pool Select the pool that you want to delete Figure 141 Click DELETE to delete that storage pool You will be prompt to confirm deletion click OK to proceed or CANCEL to cancel operation Figure 141 Delete Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS DELETE POOLS ER POOL CHUNK RAD STATE FREE RAD TOTAL RAW MACVD el satse PHYSICAL VIRTUAL V TE rner ee j NAME SIZE KB CAP GB CAP GB cer Disks osks AO ers 0 T pool 128 21784 27360 24784 10 10 3 vi 7 4 1 m pot 256 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 v y 4 a pool2 64 1248 2112 128 10 DIF 6 3 7 7 4 3 m po 32 4248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 F v 4 pod 256 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 7 v v 5 m pools 32 1440 2400 440 10 DIF 6 3 r 4 E DELETE STORAGE POOLS CANCEL 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 122 Virtual Disks Menu 4 7 Virtual Disks Menu A Virtual Disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host A virtual disk can be created to use all or just a part of the capacity of a single storage pool VDs are created in increments of 8 GiB For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a VD of 10 GiB The virtual disk commands are located under the Virtual Disk pull down menu Figure 142 Figure 142 Virtual Disk Menu Virtual Disk Create Virtual Disk Delete Virtual Disk Set Virtual Disk Attributes Show Virtual Disks 4 7 1 Show List of Virtual Disks S
167. e ee ee enes 68 36 22 Host Commands 44 ceeds tis ode de date anA vada ee dea ee ie aes 68 3 6 3 Presentation Commands cece cece eect ttnan rreri rerin 68 3 6 3 1 Persistent Reservation Support 6 cee cece cent ett renen eee eee eens 69 3 6 4 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts 065 69 3 6 5 Configure Presentations of Virtual Disks to Hosts 0 cece ee eee eee 70 3 6 5 1 Create Host Object snes ES EEN e cece eee e eee eeeenneeteeeeeeennaees 71 3 6 5 2 Identifying Host FC Connections via Ports cee scene eee eee eens 72 3 6 5 3 Import Discovered Initiators cece cece cece cette eee eeeees 75 3 6 5 4 Present a Virtual Disk to a HOSt cece eee cece reen nn 75 37 Network Time Protocol Mode 2 26 cchc ccdeeeisraaaseedeud ora dandecevesaads 78 38 DISKREDUIE songane dene E NR EAEE avian ceeecesas cae 80 3 8 1 Full and Partial Rebuilds 0 0 cee cece eee een e tent ene a 80 3 8 2 Sparing Policy ssc vcidiedastictisladdearciialadeavcinialpadeanaiielpatals 80 3 8 3 Manual Disk Replace Rebuild 0 c cece cece cece e teen e eee eeeae 81 3 84 Manual Fail Rebuild of a Disk 0c e eee cece cee nen renser 81 39 Restarting the SFA 0000 jer sek IEEE ASERRE 82 3 9 1 System RESTAM sc arrene series Wand eed TEE EESE 82 392 System Shutdown o crerrsirs iy Eai dceveseus oon ee een eee Tee en eo 82 3 10 Performance Management 0
168. e for default subject RAID Available keywords ASSIGN Assign raid object CLEAR Clear raid object states CREATE Create raid objects DELETE Delete raid objects ERASE Erase raid objects LOCATE Locate raid objects Mark Mark the event log MOVE_HOME Locate raid objects PAUSE Pause raid objects REPLACE Replace raid objects RESUME Resume raid objects SET Set raid objects SHOW Display raid objects SHUTDOWN Shutdown raid objects SYNCHRONIZE Synchronize raid objects UPDATE FIRMWARE Update firmware on raid objects VERIFY Start a Verify background job s 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 52 Managing the SFA10000 3 1 3 1 Basic Key Operations The command line editing and history features support ANSI and VT 100 terminal modes The command history buffer can hold up to 64 commands The full command line editing and history only work on main CLI and SSH sessions when entering new commands Basic Key Assignments are listed in Table 2 Simple not full command line editing only is supported when the e CLUI prompts the user for more information e alternate CLUI prompt is active The alternate CLUI is used on the RS 232 connection during an active SSH session NOTE Notall SSH programs support all the keys listed in Table 2 Table 2 Basic Key Assignments Key ANSI CTRL or Escape Sequence Description Backspace Ct
169. e include the element index within its enclosure and the enclosure WWN the outputs of SHOW ENCLOSURE and SHOW EXPANDER have the same information Use these and the SHOW ENCLOSURE command to determine the OIDEX of the IOM s enclosure 2 Physically locate the IOM that needs to be replaced First find the ENCLOSURE and then find the EXPANDER within the enclosure If the enclosures have been labeled with their WWNs then find the enclosure whose label matches the results from Step 1 above otherwise use the LOCATE ENCLOSURE command with the enclosure OIDEX from Step 1 Viewing from the back of the enclosure IOM 1 is on the left and IOM 2 is on the right While you might be able to issue a LOCATE EXPANDER command using the enclosure OIDEX from Step 1 it requires that the IOM still be working well enough to light its Identify LED 3 Identify the physical controller associated with the failing IOM Follow the cable connected to the IOM that needs to be replaced back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the other controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets 4 Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CONTROLLER lt idx gt
170. e not visible when the system first starts up select Subsystem Restart from the Subsystem Menu to reboot the system Figure 128 Show Physical Disks Screen PHYSICAL DISK SHOW ALL PHYSICAL DISKS PRODUCT Es INDEX PHYSICAL Type SPEED POOL NAME HEALTH FO MEMBER SPARE capacrty DISK ENCL VENDOR prODUGTID SERIAL NUMBER DISK OID RPM STATE STATE GB SLOTOSURE jp REVISION 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 pool 21 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS Ox 7c00Se SATA 7200 pool 16 GOOB READY NORMAL 1863 2 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3ZEA JK1170YAGRWEXP 114 Ox 10072 SATA 7200 pool 18 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 3 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOHHSN 138 0x2938008a SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 4 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAG82MRS 137 0x25 70089 SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 5 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAG3HBRS 130 0x25400082 SATA 7200 pool 19 GGOB READY NORMAL 1863 6 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGVABVS 123 0x2590007b SATA 7200 pool 19 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 7 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1171YAHOPBSN 107 0x2584006b SATA 7200 pool 17 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 8 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1171YAHOHGON 143 0x25ad008f SATA 7200 pool 21 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 9 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR3SVP 140 0x25a 1 8c SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 10 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1130YAGURULT
171. ed in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits The supplier is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xii Preface accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation European Regulations This equipment complies with European Regulations EN 55022 Class A Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipments and EN50082 1 Generic Immunity Canadian Regulations ICES 003 Class A Notice Avis NMB 003 Classe A This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A e
172. ee25882b499 In Progress In Progress 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 97 Firmware Update Management 5 When the upgrade has completed to verify that the download succeeded enter command SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd update firmware progress Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Revision Serial Number Pool Idx WWN Complete Status 1 5 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JEVWMZNC5301 UNAS 271 50014ee2032d2555 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 1 6 HITACHI HUS153014VL5300 SAS A410 JAV1YYAAS301 UNAS 272 50014ee2032d196c Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 17 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVWL5YC5301 UNAS 274 50014ee2032ca9a9 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 1 18 HITACHI HUS153014VL5300 SAS A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS 269 50014ee25882b499 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 6 Shutdown the subsystem enter command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM 7 Power cycle the enclosures containing the updated physical disks 8 After powering up the disk enclosures and controller verify the upgrade was successful enter command SHOW PD The firmware version of the updated physical disks should indicate the new version For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx Stati i 5
173. eeeeeenaes 103 4 1 Starting the GUI Management Agent cece ence eee ete enaeeeeeeeenes 107 4 1 1 Login ii ci causa eeitienaan daha wane awe sani E Wee ae aS 107 4 1 2 Home Screen and Health Indicators 6 cece cece cece e eee eeeees 108 42 Subsystem MENU 4220 nere br etken EC hEEr EERENS ENERET CEVNI EN ETENE VRA 109 4 2 1 SHOW Subsystem ar seg ere ist Enr T Ira bis aie defense ser one Fe wen pa ds 109 42 2 Set Subsystem Attributes eee ccc cece ence e nee neeneans 110 4 2 2 1 NIP SENG S eine ae E eee OERS 110 42 3 Show Background JobS cece eee cece een eee eee en eee eneeneaes 110 42 4 Set Background Jobs Attributes eee cece cent eee eee aes 111 42 5 Email and Critical Event Notification Setup cece eee ence e eens 111 45 Controllers Men vised cisds overens renees 113 4 3 1 Show Controllers a arananenuananenenennenenenenennenenenennenenenen 113 43 2 Set Controller Attributes 0 ccc ccc cece eee e teen ence ennen 113 4 3 3 Update Controller Firmware 0 ccc cece cece eect cnet nent neneeees 114 434 View System LOGS siirre akser eden eed cts oe nae saa ova ends Cees 114 AA Physical Disks MENU ccss lt ausyexmaciaa oon waneaceed Sha Aae many eed EANNA SREE 115 44 1 Show List of Physical Disks 00 cece cece cece eect DE eee nn en ences 115 AAD Locate DiSkSiscavieid cidade vektere a a E thoes 116 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1
174. el multi threaded RAID engine in each controller for a total of 2 RAID Processors across the redundant controller pair In addition to the RAID Processor each SFA10000E controller has a dedicated Application Processor This processor is responsible for managing and running the Virtual Machines with each Virtual Machine receiving one or more CPU cores a The mirrored system disk feature is not yet implemented in V1 4 0 Currently Disk A is the system disk and Disks B and C are not used 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 9 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 6 I O Ports Figure 10 and Figure 11 below illustrate the I O ports on the back of the SFA10000 and SFA10000E controllers respectively The InfiniBand ICL and Ethernet ICL ports provide connections for Mirrored Write Back Cache and control between the controllers in a couplet configuration The Disk I O Channels are used for disk enclosure connections The UPS port is used for UPS connection The RS 232 connector provides local system monitoring and configuration capabilities The VGA monitor and USB keyboard ports can be used as an alternative to the RS 232 console However the RS 232 console is recommended since its output can be logged and its connection can be longer Figure 10 SFA10000 Controller I O Ports 4 FC or 2 IB Host Ports
175. elect Show Virtual Disks from the Virtual Disk Menu Figure 142 The list of configured virtual disk s appears Figure 143 Click on the individual VD name to display its detailed information Figure 143 Show Virtual Disk Details Screen VIRTUAL DISK SHOW ALL VIRTUAL DISKS INDEX VD NAME POOLNAME STATE RAID CAP GB PREFERRED HOME CURRENT HOME FUTURE HOME WRITE BACK CACHE MIRRORED 0 vd 0_0 pool O READY RAIDS 16 AO AO d vd 1_0 pool O READY RAIDS 48 AO AO wv 2 vd 2_1 pool 1 READY RAIDS 48 A1 A1 3 vd 3 2 pool 2 READY RAIDS 48 B 0 B 0 d 4 vd 4 3 pool 3 READY RAIDS 48 Ba B 1 z 5 vd 5_4 pool 4 READY RAID6 48 AO AO Z 6 vd 6_5 pool 5 READY RAIDS 48 AA AA 7 vd 7 6 pool 6 READY RAIDS 48 B 0 B 0 PA 8 vd 8_7 pool 7 READY RAIDS 48 B 1 B 1 Fg z 9 vd 9_8 pool 8 READY RAIDS 48 A 0 AO p J 10 vd 10_9 pool 9 READY RAID1 48 AM A1 F 11 vd 11 10 pool 10 READY RAID1 48 B 0 B 0 G 12 vd 12_11 pool 11 READY RAID1 48 B 1 B 1 y A 13 vd 13_12 pool 12 READY RAID1 48 AD A0 pri pri 14 vd 14 13 pool 13 READY RAID1 48 A1 A1 Pi 15 vd 15_14 pool 14 READY RAID1 48 B 0 B 0 s 16 vd 16_15 pool 15 READY RAID1 48 B 1 B 1 Z 17 vd 17 16 pool 16 READY RAD1 48 AO AO ff ff 18 vd 18_17 pool 17 READY RAID1 48 Ad A1 f 4 l VD Name vd 0_0 VD OID 0x8c7b0000 POOL OID 0x1c790000 Useable Capacity 16 GB UUID 60001 08025a000000000008c7b0000 Current home Controller id 0x1 08029d0000 Current
176. enennene 9 1 2 5 RAID Processor and Application Processor seerne ennen 9 126 VOPOrts ussyrviasrserertinditesieridaek h r dette wed e a a oa 10 1 2 7 Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS rananananennanenenenenennener 12 Chapter 2 Installation 21 installation Overview meseriei a a a EE bbhunadeaeentads 14 22 Site Pre PAR YO asus hr eden A E a N hens E EAN A 15 2 2 1 Delivery Route Verification ssssussseussssueseesersrseesresersesees 15 2 2 2 Rack Location Air Flow and Access 0 0 ccc cc ccc cece eee ee ence eee eeenas 16 223 FlooriLOadinGiie as occa rrn I raan A RNA 17 2 24 Cooling Supply Planning 0 cece ence cece nen tent eeennenes 17 2 25 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification cece eee eee eee 17 23 Unpacking the SPA 100008 ERE budene seede 19 2 3 1 Packing Listuwddiedsdeadsawidtad dad sane caezadead E E A EEE 19 24 installing the DiskModules ivc c dcssodeis db eeebenps EEN SEES satri RENS 20 25 Cable CONMECHONS 24 alene ea dad ea eons A alone 21 25 1 Couplet CL Cabling i ccss ses essary vas detaeiveauva eee avse 21 252 Disk Enclosure Cabling lt i iceiseidiswiae iohvwinwiae kerk E 22 2 5 3 Host GOMMECHIONS i secesia ler aaa aie eden anaes MaDe oe eae eae 29 2 5 3 1 SFATOOOO REE ER ERRA ETER aa Gates 29 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xvi Table of Contents 2 5 3 2 SFATOOODE une bed letes bed ner 29 254 Management Networ
177. ent port supports 10 100 and 1000BASE T rates Figure 31 Ethernet Connections to Your Network Controller Your Management Network 2 5 5 RS 232 Console Connection Connect a null modem cable between a PC and the RS 232 connector on the back of the controller Figure 32 The RS 232 console is used to configure the management network ports during initial configuration It can also be used to log the console output and upgrade the BIOS BMC COMFIG firmware Figure 32 Connect RS 232 Console to Controller Controller RS 232 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 30 Cable Connections 2 5 6 UPS Connection 1 For each controller verify that a USB cable is attached to the port on the back of the controller and its UPS as shown in Figure 33 2 For each controller verify that the two power cables are attached to the controller s power supplies and its UPS as shown in Figure 33 Figure 33 Connect UPS to Controller To PDU To PDU 2561 UPS Battery Controller 0 AC Power Cable
178. er Guide 157 Disk Module Installation B 2 SS7000 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE TheSS7000 design allows for disk bays to be left empty without the need for fitting dummy disk modules 1 Squeeze the release tabs together on the front panel Figure 179 and carefully pull it forward out of the rack Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound Figure 179 Release Tabs on Front Panel Release Tabs 2 Open the covers Figure 180 Loosen the two Phillips screws on the covers Press the release buttons on the top cover release handles Pull up the release handles Figure 180 Open Top Covers Release Buttons Screws Release Handles 3 On the disk module press the release catch to release the handle Figure 181 Carefully slide the module into a disk slot until it contacts the baseboard and begins to engage the handle Press down on the handle until it latches which will cam the module into place Figure 181 Insert Disk Module 4 After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover release handles Replace the two Phillips screws 5 Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 158 Disk Module Installation B 3 SS2460 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE To maintain proper
179. er is NOT to be carried or transported by the handles Figure 195 Install Chassis to Rack DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 168 Rack Installation Procedure E 2 Rackmounting the UPS Unit The UPS unit is designed to fit within an 1U rack space Follow these steps to mount the UPS in your rack 1 The rackmount kit for the UPS includes two mounting brackets with 8 screws and two rack rails with 8 screws Figure 196 shows a rackmount rail Figure 196 UPS Rackmount Rail Butterfly Screws 2 Attach the two mounting brackets to the two sides of the UPS using 8 flat head screws Figure 197 Use the bracket marked LEFT for the left side when viewing from front of unit and the RIGHT bracket for the right side Figure 197 Mounting Bracket on UPS Use 4 Screws to Attach One Mounting Bracket 3 Loosen the two butterfly screws on each rack rail Figure 196 Adjust the length of the rails to fit the depth of your rack Then tighten the butterfly screws 4 Use one screw at the bottom to secure the front of the rail to the rack Figure 198 Figure 198 Secure Front of Rail to Rack Use Only 1 Screw at Bottom to Secure the Front 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 169 Rack Installation Procedure 5 Use two screws to secure the rear end of the rail to the rack Figure 199 Figure 199 Secure Rear End of Rail t
180. ere is enough space at the unpacking location to set up the ramps and remove the racks from the crates 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 15 Site Preparation 223 Rack Location Air Flow and Access The racks that comprise a single SFA10000 storage subsystem must be installed adjacent to one another so that the disk enclosure cables can be properly routed and connected The airflow through the racks is from front to back The front of one rack should not be near the back of another rack NOTE Racks with more than 5 disk enclosures have an anti tip plate installed at the floor level and it is important that it does not cover a cold air grill Access to the equipment in the racks is from their fronts and the backs Front access is for physical disk disk enclosure controller chassis and UPS maintenance Rear access is for power supply and I O module maintenance plus cabling The recommended service clearances are 48 1220 mm from the front of a rack and 30 762 mm between the back of an enclosure and a wall or 30 762 mm between the back of a SFA10000 system and the back of another enclosure that is exhausting hot air Figure 18 No service clearance is required on the side of the rack Figure 18 SFA10000 Service Area and Dimensions Rack 28 00 x 45 75 712mm x 1162mm Front Fully Extended Rear Service Service Area Disk Enclosure Area Ft 48 00 1220mm 30 0
181. ess of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide vi Important Information Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on
182. g normally 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 148 Controller Component Failures 5 6 3 Replacing an Internal Disk Module Follow these steps to replace an internal disk module at the front of the controller 1 Disengage the lock using the supplied key 2 Press the handle release button to release the handle Figure 176 3 Pull the module out of the bay Figure 176 Controller Internal Disk Module Replacement Handle Release Button i I TOO OO OOOO OR ee SOOO OOO 9 ri Le oOo A a 4 Slide the new module into the bay making sure that it is fully inserted 5 Close the handle and push the handle until it clicks indicating that the handle is latched 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 149 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 7 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 7 1 I O Module Replacement Please refer to the respective user guides if you need detailed instructions on how to physically replace an I O module on the disk enclosure The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing I O module 1 Identify the I O module IOM that needs to be replaced The need for an IOM replacement may have come from an event in an event log the results of a SHOW command an SNMP trap or an email message The event SNMP trap and email messag
183. gt Set Virtual Disk Attributes At the Set Attributes for Pool screen Figure 145 select the VD whose attributes you want to change Make the desired changes Click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 145 Set Virtual Disk Attributes Screen VIRTUAL DISK SET VD ATTRIBUTES SET ATTRIBUTES INDEX VD NAME POOLNAME STATE RAID CAP GB PREFERREDHOME CURRENTHOME FUTUREHOME WRITE BACK CACHE MIRRORED amp o fvd00 pookO EADY RAIDS 16 AD AO Pa Pi 1 mo pot READY RADS 48 AO A0 ff f 2 vd21 pom READY RAIDS 48 A1 A1 amp 3 fvd32 pool2 R RADS 48 B 0 B 0 F 7 4 k3 pools READY RAIDS 48 Bi1 Bi1 Z zZ 5 fvd54 pom READY RAIDS 48 AO AD P P 6 fres pos READY RADS 48 A1 A1 v 7 eas 9006 READY RADS 48 B 0 B 0 ff E UPDATE CANCEL DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 124 Virtual Disks Menu 4 7 4 Delete a Virtual Disk Ay When you delete a Virtual Disk you lose access to all data that was stored on that Virtual Disk Warning If you need to delete a virtual disk select Virtual Disk gt Delete Virtual Disk At the Delete Virtual Disk screen Figure 146 select the virtual disk that you want to delete Click DELETE to delete that VD or click CANCEL to cancel operation You will be prompted to confirm deletion Click OK to confirm NOTE Ifa presentation is configured for a virtual disk deleting the virtual disk will return an error You must first delete all the presentat
184. h you can select either MAC_OS or STANDARD When MAC OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack A Stack is the input side of the subsystem In the case of the SFA10000 the stack is defined as the Fibre Channel interface In future versions of the product different interface stacks may exist Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ ONLY controls read only access PRESENT HOME ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user specified LUN number that the virtual disk will show to the host 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 46 Follow these steps to set up a presentation Configuring the SFA10000 1 To display the currently available initiators enter the command Figure 59 Figure 59 Display Available Initiators APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATOR RAIDS app show discovered initiator Initiator Identifier Controller 0 Controller 1 Index Type ID node port RPO RP 1 RPO RP 1 00001 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32ae096c 0x2101001b32ae096c 3 00002 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32aeb580 0x2101001b32aeb580 10 00003 FC 0x0000e8 0
185. hat the firmware version is correct NOTE The pools may indicate there is a fault Issue the command SHOW POOLS to check the details of the pool The pools will go into WR thru state on initial startup to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The WR Thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in WR Thru mode until the issue is resolved For example CLUI unable to get RAID SUBSYSTEM NAME STATUS MIR Firmware Version Mismatch 0x30003 8 NOTE The firmware will be in MIR firmware version mismatch state for the first controller that is upgraded You must ensure that you have a CLUI prompt from the newly upgraded controller before moving to Step 4 4 Upgrade the second controller by repeating Steps 2 3 above on the other controller 31122 Windows Environment Firmware Update from the Network This method requires a SFTP or SCP client and involves two steps copying the firmware image to both controllers and launching the update 1 Copy the new firmware to the controller using an scp or sftp client You must use an application that supports SFTP or SCP WinSCP a free SFTP and SCP client is used in this example 2 Launch WinSCP or other SFTP SCP client For hostname use the IP address of your controller user name is firmware an
186. he ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt pool id gt SET SPARE command to add the disk back to the storage pool it was failed from This command will also initiate a rebuild if a spare has not already been assigned to the storage pool 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 81 Restarting the SFA10000 3 9 Restarting the SFA10000 3 9 1 System Restart The SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL REMOTE 0 1 RESTART command performs a restart on the specified controller The SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM RESTART command performs a restart on both controllers These commands will prepare the system to be restarted The system will halt all I O requests and save the data to the disks before restarting The restart process may take several minutes to complete 3 9 2 System Shutdown NOTE Use SHUTDOWN whenever you need to power down a controller for maintenance SHUTDOWN flushes any data left in the cache and prepares the SFA10000 for an orderly shutdown The SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL REMOTE 0 1 command shuts down the specified controller The SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM command shuts down both controllers If you need to power down the SFA10000 use SHUTDOWN prior to shutting off the power This will cause the SFA10000 to immediately flush its cache abort all initialization and rebuild operations and proceed with an orderly shutdown All hosts actively using the SFA10000 should be safely shutdown an
187. he memory SFA10000 24GB of RAM 12GB ECC RAID protected cache Cache memory SFA10000E 24GB ECC RAID protected cache Application memory SFA10000E 96GB ECC protected cache Number of disk modules supported Up to 1200 disks 2 4Petabytes per array Number of storage pools supported 256 Number of virtual disks supported 512 64 per storage pool Number of Spare Pools supported 16 Hot spare capability Yes RAID parity protection 1 1 RAID 1 4 1 or 8 1 RAID 5 4 2 or 8 2 RAID 6 Throughput SFA10000 12GB s sustained with large well aligned sequential IO Throughput SFA10000E 6GB s sustained IOPS SFA10000 1M to cache 300 000 to Disk IOPS SFA10000E 500 000 to cache 150 000 to Disk Reliability SES SCSI Enclosure Services protocol support Yes Temperature monitoring Yes Battery backed write back cache Yes Redundant hot swappable power modules Dual redundant 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 154 Reliability Technical Specifications Redundant hot swappable cooling modules Redundant controllers Redundant disk enclosures Physical Power amp Environmental N 1 Dual redundant N 1 Active Active Dual Controllers S6000 Disk Enclosure SS7000 Disk Enclosure Dimensions Weight Voltage range Average power Average cooling Dimensions Weight Voltage range Average power Average cooling Dimensions Weight Voltage range Po
188. hysically locate the DEM that needs to be replaced First find the ENCLOSURE and then find the EXPANDER within the enclosure If the enclosures have been labeled with their WWNs then find the enclosure whose label matches the results from Step 1 otherwise use the LOCATE ENCLOSURE command with the enclosure OIDEX from Step 1 While you might be able to issue a LOCATE EXPANDER using the enclosure OIDEX from Step 1 it requires that the DEM still be working well enough to light its Locate LED Alternatively SHOW EXPANDER provides the expander location and that corresponds to the label inside the top door of the SS6000 enclosure 3 Identify the IOM that is associated with the failing DEM SHOW EXPANDER gives a location that starts with DEM and ends with either A or B Those DEMs with locations ending in A are associated with IOM 1 and those ending in B are associated with IOM 2 4 Identify the physical controller associated with this IOM Follow the cable connected to this IOM back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the other controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets 5 Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CO
189. i SAS cable kit to connect an SFA10000 singlet or a SFA10000E couplet to 5 x 60 bay enclosures Also used to connect SFA10000 couplet to 5 x 24 bay enclosures includes 2 x 2 meter cables and 18 x 3 meter cables FRU 2460 ENC Empty chassis FRU 2460 BNK 2 5 dummy disk module DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 172 G Terminology AP Application Processor Application A layer of SFA OS that provides services external to the SFA appliance through the use of Stack Virtual Disks For example Fibre Channel block device Client Channel A port on a Client I O Controller that can be used by hosts to communicate with an Application Stack Client I O A physical interface FC or IB that has a unique PCI bus number and is utilized for one or Controller more Client Channels A Client I O Controller is managed by a single Application Stack Couplet Dual controller subsystem Discovered A volatile object that represents an FCP or SRP initiator port that is discovered on the fabric Initiator Disk Channel A port ona Disk I O Controller that can be connected to one or more Physical Disks and Disk Enclosures Disk I O A physical interface SAS that has a unique PCI bus number and is utilized for one or more Controller Disk Channels A Disk I O Controller is managed by the RAID Stack running on a single RAID Processor GiB gibibyte A unit of digital information storage and denot
190. ialize LOG_AMPD_DSK_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED DISK device initialization failure LOG_AMPD_ICL_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED ICL device initialization failure LOG_AMPD_MPI_DSK_SCSI_SENSE_DATA Disk data received LOG AMPD MPI ICL SCSI SENSE DATA ICL SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD MPI SCSI SENSE DATA EVT SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD MPI SES SCSI SENSE DATA SES SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD SES DEVICE INIT FAILED SES device initialization failure LOG ES BATTERY FAILURE PREDICTED UPS for the controller is predicted to fail and should be replaced LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT INSERTED A fan located in the power supply has been inserted LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT NORMAL A fan located in the power supply has returned to normal status LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT REMOVED A fan located in the power supply has been removed LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT WARNING Enclosure cooling element has reported a warning condition LOG_ES_DISK_SLOT_ELEMENT_INSERTED A device has been inserted into a disk slot LOG_ES_DISK_SLOT_ELEMENT_REMOVED A device has been removed from a disk slot LOG_ES_ENCL_UPS_WARN_AC UPS for the controller has started with no AC power LOG_ES_EXPANDER_ELEMENT_INSERTED A DEM or an IO module has been inserted LOG ES EXPANDER ELEMENT NORMAL The enclosure expander element has reported a warning
191. id Level C RAID1 RAIDS 4d 1p RAIDS 8d 1p RAID6 4d 2p RAID6 8d 2p How many Poolsto T create Select drive type DONT GARE FI Select spindle Speed DONT CARE Select drive size DONT CARE Allow IO during Enabled Disabled am initialization Set Priority allow 10 DONT CARE during initialization ADVANCED OPTIONS CREATE STORAGE POOL DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 120 Storage Pools OPTIONAL You may explicitly select the disks to add to the pool using the ADVANCED OPTIONS At the Create Storage Pool Advanced screen Figure 138 select the disks to add to the pool to be created Otherwise click CANCEL to cancel or click BACK to return to the previous screen Figure 138 Select Disks for Storage Pool STORAGE POOLS CREATE STORAGE POOL ADVANCED CHUNK SIZE 64KB IN BLOCKS RAID LEVEL 5 4d 1p SATAssure None Enclosure 1 Drive Capacity DONT CARE Spindle Speed DONT CARE Drive type DONT CARE BACK CREATE STORAGE POOL CANCEL 4 6 3 Configure Storage Pool Attributes To change the attributes of a storage pool select Pools gt Set Storage Pool Attributes At the Set Attributes for Pool screen Figure 139 make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save them Figure 139 Set Storage Pool Attributes Screen STORAGE POOLS SET POOL ATTRIBUTES SET ATTRIBUTES sa WRITE READ FULL FRACTIONAL rd Inn POOL z INDEX POO
192. ide 95 3 11 4 3 11 4 1 96 00259 001 Rev C Physical Disk Firmware Update Procedure There are two 2 parts to update the physical disk firmware Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Total Expanders 10 0x50000001 8 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM6 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00085LVD0A5 D02 011 D02 011 7 9 0x78000009 1 0x50000001 9 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM7 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD11A D02 011 D02 011 7 10 0x7800000a s 0x50000001 10 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM8 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD12C D02 011 D02 011 7 Firmware Update Management 1 Upload the physical disk firmware to the SFA10000 using either Linux Environment or 2 Update the Physical Disk using CLUI commands Linux Environment Firmware Upload Windows Obtain the firmware from DDN 1 2 Use the
193. inch form factor hard disk mounted in a carrier The module handle provides camming of the module into and out of disk bays and positive spring loading of the disk baseplane connector Figure 9 The handle is released by pressing the handle release button Each disk module has 2 LEDs one green and one blue Flashing green indicates disk activity while solid green indicates that the disk is online but idle When SFA OS starts it lights all 3 blue LEDs for 4 seconds During discovery and while in a MIR state the blue LEDs alternately blink from right to left Under normal condition the blue LEDs alternately blink from left to right If all of the blue LEDs are off then SFA OS is not completely running Common failures will result in a single blue LED being on or all blue LEDs being off Figure 9 Controller Internal Disk Module Handle Release Button Lock Handle 125 RAID Processor and Application Processor The two controllers are redundant and hot swappable which provide the intelligence and active active data protection features of the SFA10000 If a controller fails the remaining controller will assume its functionality and continue to provide data access at a reduced performance level The SFA10000 has two parallel multi threaded RAID engines that work simultaneously in each controller for a total of 4 RAID Processors across the redundant controller pair The SFA10000E has a single parall
194. interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specifi
195. ion Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index 1 0x78000001 1 0x50000001 1 OK TRUE OFF OFF IOM1 0078 2 0x78000002 1 0x50000001 2 OK TRUE OFF OFF IOM1 3 0x78000003 di 0x50000001 3 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM1 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD12B D02 011 D02 011 7 4 0x78000004 I 0x50000001 4 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM2 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD110 D02 011 D02 011 7 5 0x78000005 1 0x50000001 5 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM3 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00085QVD2CB D02 011 D02 011 7 6 0x78000006 i 0x50000001 6 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM4 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00086QVD109 D02 011 D02 011 7 7 0x78000007 1 0x50000001 7 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEMS TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI000893VD19D D02 011 D02 011 7 8 0x78000008 1 Firmware Update Management DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Gu
196. ion follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide iv Important Information To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An
197. ions If you are shipping the product to another location always use the original packaging provided with your unit s If you are sending a product to DataDirect Networks for warranty or out of warranty repair you must obtain a Return of Materials Authorization RMA number from DataDirect Networks Technical Support 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 178 lt 4 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth CA 91311 DataDire Je N E T WORKS www ddn com 1 800 TERABYTE 2011 DataDirect Networks Inc All rights reserved DataDirect Network the DataDirect Networks logo Silicon Storage Architecture S2A xSTREAMScaler and D MAID are trademarks of DataDirect Networks All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners
198. ions configured on that virtual disk using the Delete Presentation function under the Presentation menu Figure 146 Delete Virtual Disk Screen VIRTUAL DISK DELETE VIRTUAL DISK INDEX SELECT VD NAME POOLNAME STATE RAID CAP GB PREFERRED HOME CURRENT HOME FUTURE HOME WRITE BACK CACHE MIRRORED 3 Vv vd 3_7 pool 7 RAIDS 24 AO AO 4 r vd 4 7 pool 7 uF RAIDS 16 AO AO 4 SJ 5 r vd 5_8 pool 8 RAIDS 16 B 0 B 0 P 7 Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to delete selected virtual disks cr 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 125 Spare Pools 4 8 Spare Pools The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pool A spare pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools In the event of a disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed disk A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures Spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool NOTE Each storage pool must have a spare pool assigned to it The spare pool commands are located under the Pools pull down menu Figure 147 Figure 147 Pools Menu Pools Clear Fault Create Spare Pool i Create Sto
199. iplexor Yes SAS to SATA Bridge No None SAS only No SS7000 SAS to SAS No SAS to SATA Bridge No but None SAS only No SS2460 None No 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 141 5 5 UPS Mainten This section explains h the battery pack and h UPS Maintenance ance ow to care for the SFA10000 s UPS and battery pack how to replace ow to test the battery pack 5 5 1 UPS and Battery Pack Care The UPS contains a battery pack consisting of three batteries a frame and wiring The batteries have a useful operate when a power life of between two and three years To insure that the UPS will failure occurs the UPS battery pack should be replaced every 24 months even if the battery pack still tests okay If you store the UPS or a battery pack for a long period recharge the battery pack every six months by plugging the UPS into a power outlet To recharge a battery pack put it in a UPS and then plug the UPS into a power outlet The batteries charge to 90 capacity in approximately three hours However it is recommended that battery packs be charged for 6 to 24 hours after long term storage 5 52 Checking the UPS Status The SHOW UPS ALL ATTRIBUTES command shows the battery manufacture date and the battery life remaining in days Figure 168 Figure 168 Show UPS Attributes KR KK KKK KKK KRKKKK KEK ig UPS s KR KK KKK KKK KKK EKER Sub Index
200. ity Yellow ON no data transfer Flashing indicates data activity DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 11 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 27 Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS Each controller within the SFA10000 system is paired with a UPS to provide battery backup power when the AC mains fail The UPS is a rack mountable 1U unit Figure 15 below illustrates the positions of all the control buttons and LED indicators on the front panel The DIP switches on the back panel are set at the factory and should only be changed by the DDN field engineer Figure 16 Figure 15 UPS Front View BE eggs rr A AER Ww or A i SSS EN SE oR 4 Load Segment 2 Green Test Alarm Reset Load S t 1 Yell Power OK Green CAC Segmenti Erow On Battery Yellow Service Red Overload Red Figure 16 UPS Rear View 00000 0000 Wooocco ro 00000 orRERO00000 eg m aA oQ a a 6 ef gt GB 2559 20088 a ya ERE pe OI ac USB Connection to Controller Load Segment 1 Load Segment 2 DIP Switches nen Er ee ee ee ee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 12 Chapter 2 Installation 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 13 Installation Overview 2 1 Installation Overview He
201. k Connection cece eee ene e eee ne enes 30 2 5 5 RS 232 Console Connection 0 cece eee eee eee ee eee ee ennen 30 2 5 66 UPSConnection aranaravnnunavnnenennnenennnnnunnnnnennennunennenne 31 2 5 6 1 UPS Battery L iis aes gtaciane de pr kkkd dd Gade nd cuneeneesanquetueteneeeas 31 2 5 7 Power GCONNECHONS n 0issaneractacegawnieniesedsear adr sees bere ss ee 32 26 Powering Of the System suresusmaankesastrikkusedm kadre 32 27 Configuring the SFAIOO0O eseria espen ENE ine 34 2 7 1 Planning Your Setup and Configuration ee cece eee ee eee eens 34 2 7 2 Serial Interface Configuration cece cece cece een een eee an enes 35 273 Validate the Hardware cece eee cece ence ene n tent en ean enes 35 2 74 Clear System Configuration SFA10000 only cece eee eee eens 37 275 Setthe System Name sciietictucckisdiiekusakediewied EEEE 37 2 7 6 Set System Time amp Date NTP 0 0 0 cece cece cece eee ence ene enna 38 2 7 7 Configure Network Interface Settings cece eee eee e eee eee nes 38 2 7 8 Access Virtual Machines SFA10000E Only ce eee ee cece eee eeees 39 2 7 9 Create Storage Pools cece cece cent e ence ene eee e nee rE r 40 2 7 10 Create Virtual Disks 0 cece ccc cece eee eee nen e teen enen eens 42 2 7 11 Create and Assign Spare Pools cece cece eee eee e tent ene enenes 44 2 7 12 Present Virtual Disk to External Host SFA1000
202. ks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 71 Presentations RAID 1 application show host Stack Host Mode Attributes Index Host Name Index OS Type Characteristics 00304 co lsl 00000 LINUX 0x0000000000000001 00305 co test d10 00000 WINDOWS 0x0000000000000001 00306 co test d08 00000 WINDOWS 0x0000000000000001 Total Hosts 3 Recommendations e When creating host objects always include a descriptive name for the host objects that is easily recognizable This benefits the storage administrator in managing storage connectivity issues e The OS TYPE determines the FC flow control mechanism for host I O e The Linux OS type is currently appropriate for all versions implementations of Linux and UNIX e The Windows OS type is currently appropriate for all versions of the Windows operating systems Itis imperative the OS TYPE for Apple MAC hosts be appropriately set to MAC The setup requirements involving MAC OSX hosts require additional steps and considerations Please see Section 3 6 4 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts 3652 Identifying Host FC Connections via Ports The host ports of the controller dynamically acknowledge and log in any FC Host Port WWN connection that it can sync up with When you query the storage subsystem for the discovered initiators the listing you get will be the current set of connections that are logged in If a connection is broken and then re established
203. l Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts for more information 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 48 Configuring the SFA10000 2 7 12 2 Selective Presentation By default a LUN is accessible via all initiators ports You may mask a presentation and choose the specific port on which the initiator may have access to the LUN You may mask a presentation when you create it APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt ENABLE lt mask option gt By selecting the ENABLE option you are choosing the specific port on which the initiator may have access Controller 0 RPO ENABLE 0 Controller 0 RP1 ENABLE 1 Controller 1 RPO ENABLE 2 Controller 1 RP1 ENABLE 3 To mask a LUN to all ports use ENABLE ALL To change a mask you must first reset it with ENABLE NONE To mask a LUN to multiple ports you must set one port at a time For example to mask the same LUN 4 to Controller 0 RPO and Controller 1 RP1 APP SET PRESENTATION 4 ENABLE 0 APP SET PRESENTATION 4 ENABLE 3 27 13 Storage Pool Initialization When a storage pool is created initialization begins automatically and will continue in the background until it is completed While its virtual disk s can be accessed immediately the performance of the virtual disks will be degraded while it continues to initialize To monitor the progress of a job use the SHOW JOB ALL AT
204. l may consist of 6 or 10 physical disks For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics Such as SAS SATA capacity and RPM e Drive Type Drive types can be SAS or SATA e Drive Size Drive size is the capacity of the disk e Spindle Speed You may choose RPM 15000 10000 7200 5400 0 or SSD e SATAssure SATAssure technology is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity is always mentioned for all I O operations To create a storage pool select Pools gt Create Storage Pool At the Create Storage Pool screen Figure 137 select all the attributes for the pool Click CREATE STORAGE POOL to create the pool Figure 137 Create Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS CREATE STORAGE POOL INDEX POOL CHUNK RAD grape FREERAID TOTAL RAW eh TOUT SATAssure PHYSICAL VIRTUAL EOE MIRRORED Eg React gt NAME SIZE KB CAP GB CAP GB min DISKS DISKS CACHE SAGDE 0 pookO 128 RAIDS 217848 27360 21784 10 10 3 G ri ri 1 poo 256 RAD5 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 F 2 pook2 64 RADS 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 zZ s Z 3 pools 32 RAIDS 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 r af p 4 poos 256 RADS 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 i 4 ri 5 pools 32 RAIDS 1440 2400 1440 10 DIF 6 3 Fa af z Select chunk size C 32kb 64kb 128kb 256kb Not valid for RAID1 Select SATAssure Data Integrity Field DIF Parity None Select Ra
205. lectric shock disconnect the power from the power supply either by turning off the switch or by physically removing the power cable prior to removing the module from the enclosure e Do not remove a faulty power supply or fan module unless you have a replacement module of the correct type ready for insertion e The power connection must always be disconnected prior to removal of the power supply module from the SFA10000 or disk enclosures e A safe electrical earth connection must be provided to the power cord e Provide a suitable power source with electrical overload protection to meet the requirements given in the technical specifications Do not remove covers from the power supply module Danger of Warning electric shock inside Return the module to your supplier for repair Operation of the SFA10000 with ANY modules missing will disrupt the airflow and the components will not receive sufficient cooling It is Warning ESSENTIAL that all apertures are filled before operating the unit Recycling of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE At the end of the product s life all scrap waste electrical and electronic equipment should be recycled in accordance with National regulations applicable to the handling of hazardous toxic electrical and electronic waste materials NOTE Observe all applicable safety precautions such as weight restrictions handling batteries and lasers etc detailed in the prece
206. lf using CLUI commands 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 92 Firmware Update Management 31132 Linux Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN Firmware must be running on the controller and must be connected to the enclosure to be upgraded 1 Use the secured copy program scp to transfer the file to the expander with the command scp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of SFA10000 gt To determine the file to upload refer to Section 3 11 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive The file will be copied to the controller 31133 Windows Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN Firmware must be running on the controller and must be connected to the enclosure to be upgraded 1 Usethe putty secured copy program pscp to transfer the file to the expander with the command pscp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip_ address of SFA10000 gt NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive The file will be copied to the controller 3 11 3 4 Disk Shelf Upgrade Once the file is copied from either procedure above Linux or Windows follow the steps below to complete the upgrade 1 Log into the co
207. ll be populated into the enclosures it is best to populate the SAS disks into the front slots and install the SATA disks in the rear slots Wear an ESD wrist strap or otherwise ground yourself when handling the disk modules and components Electrostatic discharge can Warning damage the circuit boards Follow these steps to install a disk module NOTE Also refer to Appendix B if you need detailed instructions for disk module installation 1 For system using SS6000 or SS7000 disk enclosures Slide the enclosure out from the rack by squeezing the tabs on both rack slides Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound Open the enclosure covers 2 Release the handle on the disk module 3 Insert the module into a disk bay Cam the disk module home The camming foot on the base of the module will engage into the slot in the enclosure 4 When the module is fully inserted close the handle You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed NOTE On the 552460 enclosures a disk module or a dummy disk module must be installed in every slot of the enclosure in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling 5 For system using SS6000 or SS7000 disk enclosures After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover latches Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack
208. llation Procedure This appendix provides information on how to mount aSFA10000 controller and UPS unit in arack E 1 Rackmounting the Controller The SFA10000 controller is designed to fit within a 3U rack space Follow these steps to mount the controller in your rack 1 Figure 187 shows the rackmount kit for the controller There are two sets of rail and two bags of screws included Figure 187 Controller Rackmount Kit 2 The two mounting brackets should already be attached to the controller If not attach the brackets to the two sides of the controllers using six screws Figure 188 Figure 188 Mounting Bracket on Controller Use 3 Screws to Attach One Mounting Bracket 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 163 Rack Installation Procedure 3 Pull on the Front Release to unlock the inner rail from the slide assembly Figure 189 Then release the Detent Lock and push the inner rail inwards to retract the inner rail Figure 189 Slide Assembly 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 164 Rack Installation Procedure 4 Align the front bracket with the mounting holes in rack Figure 190 Optional Remove metal spacer for aluminum racks Figure 190 Attach Slides to Rack 1 vi U oO E 5 E E 3 lt 8 ou 1 oO Q N T U vw gt fo v a
209. lure Rarely a job may fail to initialize If so the event will be reported as 000737 2010 01 25 20 42 09 0684480 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_SET_FAILED STATE VIRTUAL DISK SET FAILED CONDITION INDEX 00000003 POOL 00000000 INIT FAILED If an initialization job fails enter the command VERIFY POOL lt pool id gt FORCE to restart the initialization Examples e SHOW POOL command under failed initialization conditions Total Free Max Disk Global Spare Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings Jobs T 0 spare pool Policy 0 pool 0 FAILED 128 6 I 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 60 Storage Pool Management e SHOW POOL 0 ALL command under failed initialization conditions Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 Free Raid6 Capacity 0 GB Max VD Size 0 GB Total Capacity 720 GB UUID 60001ff0800a3000000000001a520000 Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED DiskTimeout FRT 1 minute Init Policy ALLOW IO Initializing FAILED Rebuilding FALSE Paused FALSE e SHOW VD command under failed initialization conditions Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTI
210. ly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide viii Important Information or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its cover
211. mands To create a host use the command APPLICATION CREATE HOST OSTYPE GENERIC LINUX MAC OS WINDOWS To delete the specified host use the command APPLICATION DELETE HOST lt host id gt To display the presentation associated with the specified application host use the command APPLICATION SHOW HOST lt host id gt PRESENTATIONS To display the initiators associated with the specified application host use the command APPLICATION SHOW HOST lt host id gt INITIATORS 3 6 3 Presentation Commands To present a virtual disk to the specified host use the command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt To delete a presentation use the command APPLICATION DELETE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt FORCE Note the optional parameter of FORCE deletes without confirmation The wildcard deletes all presentations To set the specified attribute to the specified value use the command APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt object id gt lt attribute name gt lt value gt Attributes are ENABLE ALL NONE lt channel id gt where the channel id is the object id of an Enabled Client Channel LUN lt integer gt where the integer is a Logical Unit Number LUN that will be used to present the associated virtual disk to the associated Host NOTE Each LUN integer entered for a presentation is cumulative and does not replace the previous entry
212. nd passwords are case sensitive Figure 112 GUI Login Screen Storage Fusion 10000 Username Password LOGIN 2008 DataDirect Networks All Rights Reserved datadirectnet com S24 StorageScaler and SATAssure are trademarks of DataDirect Networks 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 107 4 1 2 Starting the GUI Management Agent Home Screen and Health Indicators The home screen shows the Health Indicator Green color is an indication of healthy condition Figure 113 Figure 113 Home Screen 1 SHOW SUBSYSTEM NAME TIME NTP MODE NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR SFA10000 Fri Apr 22 2 50 35 2011 In Figure 114 the Health Indicator is orange indicating a faulty condition The alert message below the Health Indicator indicates the component that requires attention Figure 114 Home Screen 2 SHOW SUBSYSTEM NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTPIPADDR NTP IP ADDR SFA10000 Fri Apr 22 2 50 35 2011 ATTENTION REQUIRED ER Disks o Pools NOTE Refer to Section 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States on page 137 and the SFA OS Service Manual for specific instructions on how to clear the MIR states 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 108 4 2 4 2 1 96 00259 001 Rev C Subsystem Menu Subsystem Menu Figure 115 shows the Subsystem menu
213. ne umbiiee nace SENER 136 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States ccc cece eens ence ee eeaeeees 137 5 4 Recovery from Disk Failure 2 ccc cecce ee eee ene eee ee eee nneeteeeeenennaes 139 5 4 1 Automatic Rebuild i00 ti eet stax tidavit cies areas Hida cinwieet ones 139 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xx Table of Contents 54 2 Spare Disk Replacement arenenuananenenenunanenenenennanenenenenenr 140 5 4 3 When a Spare is not available 0 cece cece eee e teen eee eens 140 544 Manual Rebuild 0 c ccc c cee cnn cence ene enn en eee ee eeenes 140 5 4 5 Power Cycling Disk Drives 0 cee cece cece e eee eee eee en ee eeneaes 141 Dio UPSMENENINGE vunne T wie arken banene 142 5 5 1 UPS and Battery Pack Care 0 eee cece cence n eee teen eeneeeeenes 142 5 5 2 Checking the UPS Status 0 eee nni t ee cece eee nee nent ene en eens 142 55 3 Replacing the Battery Pack cece cece e eee eee cent een eanenes 143 5 5 3 1 Testing Batteries ss anden nen banke EOE EE EAEE 145 5 6 Controller Component Failures 0 00 0 cece cece cece cece cece ee eeeeeneeeees 146 5 6 1 Replacing a Power Supply Module e cece eee e eee e ene eeeees 147 56 2 ReplacingaFan Module cece eee e eect eee e eee e ieie 148 56 3 Replacing an Internal Disk Module cece eee e eee svn renees 149 5 7 Disk Enclosure
214. ntee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute
215. ntroller User name is user Password is user 2 One of the controllers needs to be shut down after the subsystem is offline At the CLUI prompt enter command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL This will shut down the local controller You will then need to log into the other controller and issue the upgrade command as shown in the next step This will need to be done for each of the disk enclosures 3 At the CLUI prompt enter the command UPDATE ENCLOSURE lt enclosure num gt FILE lt file name uploaded gt To determine the enclosure number in a system issue the command SHOW ENCLOSURE This will display the list of enclosures connected to the system as shown below 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 93 Firmware Update Management kkkkxkxkxkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Enclosure s ig kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Idx Type Logical ID Vendor ID Product ID Revision FW Version 0 CONTROLLER 0x0001 0801c90000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 0 1 DISK 0x50001 210030000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 2 DISK 0x50001 210006000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 3 DISK 0x50001 21000a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 4 DISK 0x50001 210008000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 5 DISK 0x50001 21002a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 6 CONTROLLER 0x0001 0802810000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 0 Total Enclosures 7 The upgrade will take approximately 1 hour for each enclosure 4 To monitor the upgrade progress enter the c
216. ntroller prior to upgrading the enclosure firmware Use the CLUI command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER REMOTE 3 11 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions To determine which file s you need to upload you will need to determine the enclosure types you have To do this issue the CLUI command SHOW ENCLOSURE This will display the enclosure information in a table format KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ig Enclosure s Ko KKK KKK Idx Type Logical ID Vendor ID Product ID Revision FW Version 0 CONTROLLER 0x0001ff 0801c90000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 1 DISK 0x50001 210030000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 2 DISK 0x50001 210006000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 3 DISK 0x50001 21000a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 4 DISK 0x50001 210008000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 5 DISK 0x50001 21002a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 6 CONTROLLER 0x0001 f 0802810000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 Total Enclosures 7 The naming convention of the files match up accordingly e SFA10000 controller SFA10000_ lt FW Version gt DDN e SS6000 SS6000_ lt FW Version gt DDN e 557000 SS7000 lt FW Version gt DDN e 552460 SS2460_ lt FW Version gt DDN Ay Before starting this procedure verify that a power cycle or any perturbations to the system is NOT required for the next 2 hours Warning There are two 2 parts to update the enclosure firmware 1 Upload the enclosure firmware to the controller using either Linux Environment or Windows 2 Update Disk She
217. ny additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions dire
218. o Rack Use 2 Screws to Secure the Rear End 6 Slide the UPS onto the rack rails Then use one screw on each side to secure the mounting brackets to the rack Figure 200 Figure 200 Secure UPS to Rack Use Screw Here 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 170 96 00259 001 Rev C FRU Part Numbers This appendix provides the list of field replaceable unit FRU part numbers Controller FRU FRU Part Number oe Description FRU 10K PS 2 Power supply module FRU 10K FM 4 Fan module FRU 10K RLK 1 24 inch rail kit FRU 10K IHD 3 1TB SATA Internal hard drive cache protect and firmware FRU 10K BBU 1 UPS includes UPS rail kit and cables FRU 10K BBUB UPS FRU 10K BBU replacement battery 10KS BLKFC FR SFA10000 controller with 8 FC 8 ports 10KS BLKIB FR SFA10000 controller with 4 QDR IB SRP ports S56000 Disk Enclosure FRU DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 171 FRU Part Number bane Description FRU 60S RLK3 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU 60S CMA2 1 Cable management arms FRU 60S PS3 2 Power supply module FRU 60S DEM 8 DEM module FRU 60S IOM2 2 I O module KIT CBL10KSS SAS cable kit to connect controller to disk enclosures includes 8 x 2 meter cables and 12 x 3 meter cables CBL MSMS 1M 1 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 2M 2
219. of the products Please contact our Technical Support Department to obtain the latest firmware files Before performing any updates please note the following e The UPDATE ENCLOSURE command starts a background operation so that the CLUI is free to do other operations during the UPDATE The status that comes back from the UPDATE ENCLOSURE command only indicates whether the background operation was successfully started SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS should be used immediately after the command and then subsequently periodically to check the status of the UPDATE e When you SCP the Consolidated Download File DDN to the firmware directory it must be copied to the PRIMARY controller Since the PRIMARY may change it is probably best to copy it to BOTH controllers If SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS reports statusJS ES DL UCODE OPEN FAILED the most likely cause is that the file was not copied to the PRIMARY controller e When the SFA10000 is busy rebuilding initializing or doing host I O UPDATE ENCLOSURE operations may fail because the enclosure is too busy to service the UPDATE IOs in a timely fashion Therefore make sure that there are no rebuilds initializations or host I O operations being done during the UPDATE ENCLOSURE operation In order to cause the new enclosure firmware to start being used you must power cycle the enclosure In the SFA10000 it is best to do this by doing a SHUTDOWN SUBSYS
220. ollowed by power cycling the enclosure 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 88 St 1 1 3112 Firmware Update Management Displaying Current Firmware Version The SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES and SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES commands display version information of the SFA10000 s hardware and firmware Figure 100 Figure 100 show Controller Information Screen RAID 0 show controller 0 all Index 0 OID 0x38000000 Firmware Version Release 1 4 Firwmare Release Version Source Version 6962 DDN lt g _ Code Base Version Fully Checked In Yes Private Build No Build Type Production Build Date and Time 2011 05 08 15 38 UTC Builder Username root Builder Hostname co bs2 Build for CPU Type AMD 64 bit Hardware Version 0000 State RUNNING Name A Controller LOCAL SECONDARY Controller ID 0x0001 0800a30000 lt j ID used for Key Generation Enclosure OID 0x50000006 Index 6 Universal LAN Address 0x00000001ff0800a3 MIR Reason None lt j State of Controller None is good NTP Sync other controller Controller Firmware Update Procedure The firmware update procedure described here only applies to upgrades from firmware version 1 0 3 3 xxxx or later to a new version Upgrades from an older version of firmware must be done by a trained technician NOTE The SFA10000 now supports an upgrade of the firmware while the system is
221. ommand SHOW ENCLOSURE 1 UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example RAID 0 show enclosure 1 update firmware progress ES download progress for enclosure 1 CDF file name tmp janus update SFA D02 011 DDN CDF is for Vendor ID DDN gt CDF is for Product ID SFA OS CDF package version D02 011 CDF release date 01 Mar 2011 Download is in progress and 15 percent complete Download consists of 2 images Image 2 is in progress and 13 percent complete NOTE An alternate command to monitor the upgrade progress SHOW ENCLOSURE 1 UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS The at the end of the command will automatically reissue the command until a key is depressed You can watch the upgrade status without having to re enter the command 5 Verify if the update is completed enter the command SHOW ENCLOSURE 1 UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example RAID 0 show enclosure 1 update firmware progress ES download progress for enclosure 1 Download not in progress last download completed successfully 6 When the download is completed you must power cycle the enclosure Prior to powering off the enclosure issue the SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM command NOTE Make sure the power is left off for at least 30 seconds after the power down or the controller may not boot up correctly the first time 7 Verify that the upgrade was successful by using the command SHOW EXPANDER NOTE The expanders are Sub Index 3 thru 10 Ensure that the Firmware ve
222. on of a LUN virtual disk to a host e Establish a host object for EACH host that wishes access to the SFA10000 storage system virtual disk NOTE On the storage subsystem you ONLY need to create a single host object for any all virtual disk presentations to that host e Import a discovered initiator into an established relationship with a host object An association between a discovered initiator FC Port Node WWN World Wide Name to a host object is established in this operation This association of host port WWN to host object is maintained persistently within the subsystems configuration information along with all other information Ifthe host to controller association is subsequently disrupted and then re established the controller is able to maintain this relationship until such 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 70 Presentations time that the configuration in the storage controller is cleared or that relationship is deleted TIP Use ofa host based HBA utility such as HBAnyware or SANsurfer will allow you to examine the FC Port Node WWNs on the host in the easiest manner e Assign a virtual disk to a host object NOTE You may ONLY presenta virtual disk ONCE to the same host object You can present a virtual disk to multiple hosts however this is dangerous If doing so presenting them as Read Only to the other Warning hosts would be appropriate
223. ons Example for Linux system without driver loaded cd sys class fc_host ls la total 0 drwxr xr x drwxr xr x drwxr xr x drwxr xr x cd host3 Is la total 0 drwxr xr x 3 root root 0 Jul 15 drwxr xr x 4 root root 0 Jul 15 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Jul 15 devices pci0000 00 0000 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 YW 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 drwxr xr x 2 root root 0 Jul 15 11 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Jul 15 11 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 r r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 rw r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 rw r r 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 W 1 root root 4096 Jul 1 cat port name 4 root root 0 Jul 15 11 47 a 43 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 3 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 host3 3 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 host4 7 Ui ee III III I PrRrRrReY As bot Ls Ed k UN UUNVUMmgIUNUNUuu au wo 15 11 48 11 47 11 47 device gt 00 04 0 0000 0a 00 0 host3 fabric name issue lip node name port id port name 47 3 3 3 3 3 31 port state 31 port type 231 s S 3 3 3 3 4 speed atistics ubsystem gt class fc_host L supported classes symbolic name system hostname tgtid bind type uevent 0x2100001b3282dc50
224. ontroller that you are currently logged into Figure 107 Current Network Interface Settings Screen RAID 0 ui show network interface local 0 Network device id 0 address 10 32 31 31 netmask 255 255 240 0 gateway 10 32 16 2 Change Network Interface Settings NOTE Initial network interface settings must be configured using the serial interface Refer to Section 2 7 7 Configure Network Interface Settings for instructions To change the network interface settings on the controller you are connected to enter the command Figure 108 UI SET NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL 0 IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt IP MASK lt netmask gt IP GATEWAY lt gateway gt Figure 108 Set Network Interface Example RAID 0 ui set network interface local 0 ip address 10 32 31 31 ip mask 255 255 240 0 ip gateway 10 32 16 2 NETWORK INTERFACE 0 set with STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 101 3 13 4 5135 313521 96 00259 001 Rev C Logins Remote Management of SFA10000 By default the login name is user and its password is user Figure 109 Both are case sensitive Only one SSH session is permitted at a time Once a SSH session is initiated the RS 232 console switches to a CLI sub shell The SSH client should be using port 22 with its local echoing function disabled Figure 109 SSH Login Screen login Linux as u
225. orage pool will blink 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 62 Virtual Disk Management 3 4 Virtual Disk Management A virtual disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host A virtual disk can be created to use all or just a part of the capacity of a single storage pool Virtual disks allocate space in 8 GiB increments For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a virtual disk of 10 GiB 3 4 1 Display Virtual Disk Information The SHOW VIRTUAL_DISK command displays the list of configured virtual disks in the system Figure 79 Figure 79 Show Configured Virtual Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 READY 0 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 1 vd 1 1 READY L 9 3632 W L O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 2 2 READY 2 5 3632 W E O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 3 3 READY 3 5 5480 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 4 vd 4 4 READY 4 5 5480 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 6 vd 6 5 READY mi ry 5480 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 6 The SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command displays the detailed information of the specified virtual disk Figure 80 Figure 80 Show Virtual Disk Attributes Example Screen RAID 0 show vd 0 all Index 0 OID 0x8a680000 Name vd 0_0 Pool Index 0 Pool OID 0x1a520000 Capacity 472 G
226. ort 11 internal disk module controller 9 rack location 16 RAID processor controller 9 rebuild automatic set 80 UPS 12 loading floor 17 fractional 80 full 80 logue manual initialize 81 logout 52 102 partial 80 log event 99 114 set priority 86 NA repair how to return product for 178 Manual Intervention Required 137 replace disk manual 81 masking 49 restart MIR 137 controller 82 clear state 137 subsystem 82 conditions 137 right side I O 84 mirrored write back cache set 83 RMA obtaining 178 RS 232 interface set up 51 N RS 232 terminal set up 51 name set subsystem 37 sS network interface change 101 Network Time Protocol 78 110 sales contacting 178 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 176 96 00259 001 Rev C SAS cable replace 152 SATA disk power cycle 141 SATAssure 61 SATAssure set 82 SCSI persistent reservation 69 serial port set up 51 service clearance 16 SFA 2 shutdown controller 82 subsystem 82 site preparation 15 SNMP set up 103 spare pool create 44 66 delete 66 display 65 global 65 name change 66 view list of 64 sparing policy 80 specifications technical 154 SSH 101 SS6000 disk map 160 storage pool configuration checking 56 create 40 59 delete 62 initialization 60 list of view 57 location physical 62 name change 62 SATAssure set 82 sparing policy 80 status 57 verify 62 y technical specifications 154 te
227. orts Client Channels Figure 5 SFA10000E Controller Rear View Power Supply Module 1 Disk Channels IB Inter Controller Link opo OOCGOOOOOOOOOOOOCEOOOOO 2e lt A A B cg gt DOG OOO0000000000000000 30999050 Seg 000000d00000000 88888888888888858885H ABBA po00000000000009000000 0000000000000000C0 ooon E E NG oooaceacecec Ferden FESPBSRBSRE Grann DAE pg o00000000000 Soo BEb00000000 Ian O I 1 59009000 GOOOOOOOOOOOLECOOOOOO EF EEG ER TE TEENS OOSOO0O0 I ie 800000000 DEERE REE FEER SE e QOUOUOUI BOGOOLOYPLOLNL A05000000 Sabddbadkadtadtaodarddod qe aoc ee He E ji Sooogooo0o cae amma BAC qe oO0O00000000 00 OOOOSOOOL Bo090000 I a0r00000 Dni Tana aa RS 232 Power Supply Ethernet USB Host Ports P Host Ports Module 2 Ports Ports ort 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 6 The SFA10000 System Hardware 121 Status LED Indicators Figure 6 below illustrates the positions of all the control buttons and LED indicators on the front panel The LEDs are defined in Table 1 The USB port can be used for downloading new firmware and BIOS to the controller Figure 6 Controller Front Panel Control Buttons and Status LED Indicators Enclosure Management Network Activity LED Ethernet Locate Indicator ICL Activity Fault LED Ethernet ICL Activity Power Indicator On Off Button ES Internal HDD Activity USB Port
228. otection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6 e Chunk Size CHUNK The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the storage pool NOTE RAID 1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed Disk Count NUMBER A RAID 1 storage pool may consists of 2 physical disks A RAID 5 storage pool may consist of 5 or 9 physical disks A RAID 6 storage pool may consist of 6 or 10 physical disks For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics such as SAS SATA capacity and RPM To create a storage pool use the CREATE POOL command 1 Atthe CLUI prompt type CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL raid1 raid5 raid6 CHUNK_SIZE 32 64 128 256 ASSIGN_POLICY SAS SATA NUMBER 2 5 6 9 10 or PHYSICAL DISK lt list of disks gt INIT_ALLOW lt initialization policy gt SATASSURE NONE DATA_INTEGRITY_FIELD PARITY where lt list of disks gt index name of disks lt initialization policy gt Allow_IO NO_IO Priority 1 99 where 99 puts all system resources on the initialization You may either explicitly select the disks for the pool by using PHYSICAL DISK or specify the number of disks in the pool by using NUMBER in which case the next available disks will be selected Figure 46 You may disable the SATAssure feature or enable it to use either the data in
229. pe Production Build Date and Time 2010 05 28 22 10UTC Builder Username root Builder Hostname co bs2 Build for CPU Type AMD 64 bit Hardware Version 0000 State RUNNING Name A Controller LOCAL SECONDARY Controller ID 0x0001 0800a30000 Enclosure OID 0x50000006 Index 6 Universal LAN Address 0x00000001 0800a3 C MIR Reason None b Listed below are some commonly seen MIR conditions and their required actions Refer to the DDN SFA OS Service Manual for a complete list of MIR conditions MIR_JIS_DISCOVERY_IN_PROG Initialized Storage discovery is in progress Please allow time for configuration discovery to complete If this condition persists please reboot the system If this condition continues to persist after the reboot please contact customer support MIR_OTHER_JIS_DISCOVERY_IN_PROG Initialized Storage discovery is in progress on other controller Please allow time for configuration discovery to complete If this condition persists please reboot the system If this condition continues to persist after the reboot please contact customer support MIR_NO_BACKEND_DRIVES This controller cannot find any disk modules on the backend Install disk modules on the backend or fix the condition that prevents this controller from finding backend disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 137 96 00259 001 Rev C Manual
230. pool is created you will need to select disk s from the Unassigned Pool and assign it the spare pool In the event of disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed disk A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If a storage pool s attributes show Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED no spare pool will serve this storage pool 3 5 1 Display Spare Pool Information Use the SHOW SPARE POOL command to display the list of configured spare pool s Figure 83 Figure 83 Show Configured Spare Pools Example Screen RAID 0 show spare pool Disk Total Total Storage Idx Name IBlocks T O Cap GB PDs Pool Idx 6 spare pool 6 512 10 528 2 7 spare pool 7 512 10 528 2 Total Spare Pools 2 To display the detailed information of the spare pool enter the command SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 84 Figure 84 Show Spare Pool Attributes Example Screen RAID 0 show spare pool 6 all Index 6 OID 0x19bc0006 Type GLOBAL SPARE Name 19bc0006 Block Size 0x200 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Total Capacity 1409024 MBs UUID 0x00 Total Phy Disks 2 Storage Pool List Index 0 OID 0x1c790000 To display the list of disks in the spare pool enter the command Figure 85
231. r if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you
232. r example utility power and UPS power or to a single AC power source That is half the power cords provide sufficient power to operate the system however all power cords must be plugged to take advantage of redundant DC power supplies Each SFA10000 controller has a UPS that is used to protect its cached data in the event of a power failure These must be configured with firmware and switch settings depending on the AC voltage and how the site power is grounded This configuration is best done at the DDN factory and so it is helpful to provide these measurements to DDN as part of the order To Do List e Measure and note down the three voltages X Y X G and Y G as shown in Figure 20 e Each UPS unit has two DIP switches on the back During installation verify that the switches are correctly set as described in Section 2 5 7 e After power on verify that the UPS firmware versions match the above measured voltage as described in Section 2 7 3 If these are not correct then have a DDN Field Engineer correct them If either voltage X G or voltage Y G is less than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 Ifboth voltages X G and Y G are greater than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 83 74 SSS SSS eee 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 18 Unpacking the SFA10000 2 3 Unpacking the SFA10000 The SFA10000 system components
233. rage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delete Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool Verify Pools 4 8 1 Show Spare Pools To view the list configured spare pools select Pools gt Show Spare Pools Click on the individual spare pool name to display its detailed information Figure 148 Click on the Total Member column to display the list of disks in that spare pool Figure 148 Show Spare Pool Screen SPARE POOLS SHOW ALL SPARE POOLS INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare pool 3 10 1808 9 spare pool 9 3 10 2712 PHYSICAL SPEED poor PD MEMBER SPARE capacity DISK ENCL VENDOR PRODU INDEX Siskon RPM NAME TH staTe stare POOL GB SLOT OSURE jp PRODUCTID Revision SERIAL NUMBER 199 0x217100c7 SAS 7200 Soe GOOD READY NORMAL s 931 7 1 SEAGATE ST310004248S 0006 9WK08SGR0000C035AQKO 174 0x215800ae SAS 7200 ee GOOD READY NORMAL 931 8 1 SEAGATE ST3100042488 0006 9WKOSACNO000CO34ASTG 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 126 Spare Pools 4 8 2 Locate a Spare Pool To locate a spare pool select Pools gt Locate Spare Pools At the Locate Spare Pool screen Figure 149 select the spare pool and the screen ch
234. re 40 Show UPS Attributes KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK UPS s KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Sub Index Sub OID 0x80000001 Enclosure Index 0 Enclosure OID 0x50000000 Position SES Status OK 96 Charge Level f t Charge Level Hold Up Time Remaining 17 minutes Enabled TRUE AC Failed FALSE Present TRUE Interface Failed FALSE Battery Health OK Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Battery Mfg Date Fri Nov 19 21 44 38 2010 Battery Life Remaining 648 days Part number PW5115 RM 1500VA Serial number GD371A0853 Firmware version Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 o Firmware Version 2 7 4 Clear System Configuration SFA10000 only A Use of the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION command will destroy any existing data Warning NOTE For SFA10000E the storage has been preconfigured so the existing configuration should NOT be cleared Skip this step and proceed to Section 2 7 5 Set the System Name To ensure that you are starting from a fresh clean install enter CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION Then enter YES twice to confirm deletion of current configuration Figure 41 Figure 41 Clear Subsystem Configuration RAID 0 clear subsystem configuration Are you sure you want to delete this configuration No yes Are you sure you want to delete this configuration All data will be lost No yes RAID SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION cleared STATUS Success 0x0
235. re Home Oxffffffff 0x00000000 Preferred Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Job OID INACTIVE UUID 60001 08025a000000000008c7b0000 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 43 Configuring the SFA10000 2711 Create and Assign Spare Pools The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pool A spare pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools In the event of disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed disk A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures Spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool After a spare pool is created you will need to select disk s from the Unassigned Pool and assign it to the spare pool Follow these steps to create a spare pool 1 At the CLUI prompt enter the command CREATE SPARE POOL Figure 53 Amessage is displayed to indicate whether the new spare pool creation was successful Figure 53 Create Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 create spare pool SPARE POOL 6 OID 0x19bc0006 create STATUS Success 0x0 2 Assign physical disk s to the spare pool Enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt pool id gt wher
236. re is an overview of all the steps needed to be taken to complete an installation and configuration of an SFA10000 10000E system NOTE All installation procedures apply to both the SFA10000 and SFA10000E systems unless otherwise stated 1 Site preparation 2 Unpack the system 3 Install the disk modules into the disk enclosures 4 Connect the cables 5 Power up the system 6 Verify zoning configuration on disk enclosures 7 Validate the hardware 8 Configure the network interface settings via the RS 232 console 9 For SFA10000 configure the storage create storage pools virtual disks spare pools and presentations For SFA10000E use either a VNC viewer or SSH to access the preconfigured Virtual Machines 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 14 Site Preparation 2 2 Site Preparation This section provides information on how to prepare a site prior to installing a SFA10000 system The site preparation steps include e Delivery route verification e Rack location air flow and access e Floor loading e Cooling supply planning e AC power supply planning and verification 2271 Delivery Route Verification Each SFA10000 system consists of one to two 19 racks Each of these racks is shipped in a large crate on a pallet Figure 17 Crate Containing One that weighs between 1000 Ibs 454 55 kg and 1500 Ibs SFA10000 Rack 681 82 kg and measures 53 x 40
237. ready and there are not enough resources to allow another connection Only one CLUI connection is currently supported 5 2 Event Log Some types of issues can be seen from the event log e Background jobs affecting performance 014547 2009 08 31 12 30 08 1953906 G 62 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE STATE POOL MEMBER CHANGE INDEX 00000000 ID 0x5000cca20def4516 PDIDI 0085 MEMBER INDEX 0000 STATE REBUILD e Backend issues affecting performance 000425 2009 04 28 14 39 12 6963749 G 10 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG AMPD MPI SAS DEVICE DISAPPEARED AMPD IOCO WWN 5000cca216ed8430 ES 50001 101ed0000 60 RC 04 Hndl 0065 PrntId 50001ff10led017f PHY 08 BT 00 14 DI 00000081 DSK 0000 000430 2009 04 28 14 39 13 8133330 G 10 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG AMPD MPI SAS DEVICE APPEARED AMPD IOCO WWN 5000cca216ed8430 ES 50001 101ed0000 60 RC 03 Hndl 0065 PrntId 50001ff10led017f PHY 08 BT 00 14 DI 00000081 DSK 0000 e ICL problem link bounce 000468 2009 08 25 22 04 20 7729086 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG AMPD ICL LINK STATUS CHANGE AMPD Ctx 2 0006c24528 Drv 2 0006c2ed80 Old DWN New UP 000469 2009 08 25 22 04 20 7729497 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG DUCK CONTROLLER CONNECTED DUCK Controller Connected e ICL problem controller failure 008418 2009 07 29 08 16 50 9043234 G 60 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG DUCK CONTROLLER DISCONNECTED DUCK Controller Disconnected 008419 2009 07 29 08 16 50 9043363 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST OTHER DIED STATE OTHER
238. reboot LOG ST MIR STATE Manual Intervention Required state LOG ST MIRROR JOIN FAIL Other controller unable to flush mirror data status LOG ST NO CONFIG READ Unable to read the configuration from backend drives status LOG ST NO CONFIG WRITE Unable to write the configuration to backend drives status LOG ST POOL CHANGE Pool state changed LOG ST SET AWL Auto Write Lock condition LOG ST SET CRITICAL Critical condition state LOG ST SET FAILED Failed condition LOG ST SPLIT BRAIN The controllers have lost communications with each other and are operating in split brain mode LOG SYS STARTUP The system has been restarted DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 105 Chapter 4 GUI Management Agent 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 106 Starting the GUI Management Agent This chapter provides information on using the SFA10000 GUI Graphic User Interface Management Agent 4 1 Starting the GUI Management Agent 4 1 1 Login Using a web browser open a link to the IP address of the SFA10000 controller The SFA Management System supports Mozilla FireFox version 3 0 11 and above as well as Microsoft Internet Explorer version 8 0 and above At the login screen Figure 112 enter the user name admin with the password password to log into the system User name a
239. ree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of th
240. rformance and capacity demands lowering both acquisition and operation costs e SATAssure Data Protection SATAssure technology Silent Data Corruption Detection and Avoidance is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity is always mentioned for all I O operations Battery Backed Write Back Cache SFA OS provides a write back cache feature that is used to improve I O performance Write back cache data that has not been written to disk is preserved by maintaining power to the cache memory in the event of an AC mains failure long enough to copy the contents of the cache to stable storage In addition SFA OS is designed to tolerate a simultaneous AC mains failure and RAID software failure 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 3 Introduction Mirrored Write Back Cache Currently SFA OS provides the ability to mirror all write back cache data such that the failure of a single controller will not result in data loss A storage administrator can optionally turn off write back cache mirroring for a RAID set for higher performance however data protection is reduced for logical units within that RAID set Mirrored Transaction Journal RAID write holes are prevented by executing stripe updates as ACID Atomicity Consistency Isolation Durability transactions If the transactions are interrupted by a power failure they can be recovere
241. rl H deletes preceding character Delete Del or Esc 3 deletes current character Up Arrow Esc A retrieves previous command in the history buffer Down Arrow Esc B retrieves next command in the history buffer Right Arrow Esc C moves cursor to the right by one character Left Arrow Esc D moves cursor to the left by one character Home Esc H or Esc 1 get the oldest command in the history buffer End Esc K or Esc 4 get the latest command in the history buffer Insert Esc 2 toggles between insert mode and overtype mode PgUp Esc 5 retrieves oldest command in the history buffer PgDn Esc 6 retrieves latest command in the history buffer Ctrl U Ctrl U delete to beginning of line Ctrl K Ctrl K delete to end of line Ctrl A Ctrl A move cursor to beginning of line Ctrl E Ctrl E move cursor to end of line EEK 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 53 Physical Disk Information 3 2 Physical Disk Information The disks in the system are categorized into one of the following pools e Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool e Storage Pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group A collection of 2 to 10 disks ideally of the same capacity and type e Spare Pool This type of pool contains Physical Disks that can be used a
242. rnet ports are included to provide local and remote management capabilities 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 4 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 The SFA10000 System Hardware This section describes the hardware components of the SFA10000 controller Refer to DDN SS6000 User Guide DDN SS7000 User Guide and DDN SS2460 User Guide for hardware descriptions on the SS6000 SS7000 and SS2460 disk enclosures The SFA10000 controller is a three unit 3U rack mountable enclosure Figure 2 Figure 2 SFA10000 Controller Chassis At the front there are four fan modules three internal disk modules control buttons and status LED indicators Figure 3 Figure 3 SFA10000 Controller Front View without Bezel Internal Disk Internal Disk Internal Disk Disk A J Disk B Disk C
243. rsion and the Init String version are identical If the Firmware version field indicates VARIOUS this indicates that the expanders i e DEMs have not accepted the update You will need to power cycle the enclosure again to try and clear this condition If the VARIOUS state still exists after the second power cycle you will need to re run the upgrade procedure 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 94 96 00259 001 Rev C For example RAID 0 show expander 1 all Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Firmware version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Locat
244. s spare disks in one or more storage pools 3 2 1 Disk Information To display the list of all the disks installed in the system enter the command Figure 70 SHOW PHYSICAL DISK Figure 70 Show Physical Disk List Example Screen KKKKKKKKK KERK KK KKK KKK Physical Disks EE RR ER ER RK Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WWN 1 SEAGATE ST3200044455 SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMODRNO0000C0331KWFJ 0 GOOD 139 NORM 5000c50010444e40 2 SEAGATE ST32000444SS SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMOHBM10000C034D008 0 GOOD 138 NORM 5000c500104a1370 3 SEAGATE ST3200044455 SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMOFY4G0000C0372EJE 0 GOOD 128 NORM 5000c50020c7c8 0 4 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO43HWO000C0283GKU UNAS GOOD 190 READY 5000c500103939fc 5 SEAGATE ST3200044455 SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMOJVDG0000C032G0Q1 0 GOOD 180 NORM 5000c50020c43740 6 SEAGATE ST3200044455 SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WM0JZ510000C034CXFP 0 GOOD 177 NORM 5000c50020c40f5c 7 2K 0006 9WKO8SGRO000C035AQKO UNAS GOOD 199 READY 5000c50020cb02a4 8 2K 0006 9WKO6ACNO000C034ASTG UNAS GOOD 174 READY 5000c500104ec228 9 2K 0006 9WKO6BMRO000C032G0VJ UNAS GOOD 192 READY 50000500104 9d84 2K 0006 9WK07KJ20000C032B05W 2 GOOD 130 NORM 5000c50020caf5e0 2K 0006 9WKO6BXY00005005SDYV UNAS GOOD 170 READY 5000c500104f7e5c 2K 0006 9WKO6SNV0000C0268B7K UNAS GOOD 193 READY 50000500104ded34 2K 0006 9WKO8HZCO000C035HZ5Z UNAS GOOD 166 READY 5000050020cble20 2
245. s whose extents may be parts of RAIDset s The set of physical disks that are not assigned to any pool A set of disk blocks that may be presented to an operating system It is also the primary logical object realized by the back end DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 174 Index 96 00259 001 Rev C AA AC power requirement 17 airflow 16 AP 173 application processor controller 9 application stack 173 B background job 85 battery replace UPS 142 cC cable replace 152 cache mirrored write back set 83 write back set 83 CLUI using 51 controller application processor 9 fan 8 fan replace 148 hardware 5 internal disk modules 9 internal disk replace 149 IO ports 10 LED status 7 power supply 8 power supply replace 147 RAID processor 9 cooling requirements 17 create spare pool 44 66 storage pool 40 virtual disk 42 customer service contacting 178 D DataDirect Networks contacting 178 date set system 78 delete storage pool 62 virtual disk 64 DEM replace SS6000 151 DIP switch UPS 32 discovered initiators 46 67 disk fail a 81 failure recovery 139 fail clear 81 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 175 information 55 internal controller 9 listing all 54 location physical 56 replace manual 81 SATA power cycle 141 states 55 disk enclosure cable connections 22 DEM replace SS6000 151 I O module replace 150 zoning
246. se and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and
247. secured copy program scp to transfer the file to the controller with the command scp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of SFA10000 gt NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command Enter the password case sensitive Firmware The file is copied to the controller DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 96 Firmware Update Management 31142 Windows Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN 1 Usethe putty secured copy program pscp to transfer the file to the controller with the command pscp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of SFA10000 gt NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password case sensitive Firmware The file is copied to the controller 3 11 4 3 Physical Disk Upgrade Once the file is copied from either procedure above Linux or Windows follow the steps below to complete the upgrade 1 Log onto the controller User name is user Password is user 2 Atthe CLUI prompt enter command SET SUBSYSTEM OFFLINE NOTE The subsystem must be offline before proceeding with the remaining steps 3 At the CLUI prompt enter command UPDATE PD FILE lt file name uploaded gt The firmware will be updated on any physical disks that match the Vendor Id Product Id and Drive Type SAS SATA in the file The upgrade time varies but typically takes less than
248. ser user 10 23 23 16 s password none 2 6 25 ddn 016620 3 2 SMP Wed Jan 14 10 38 28 MST 2009 x DataDirect Networks Storage Scalar 6620 tm J Logout To logout enter command QUIT For SSH connection the current session will be disconnected Email and SNMP Notification Setup Email Setup There is only one logical EMAIL_AGENT for the subsystem While each controller has an EMAIL AGENT the two are ideally managed as a single logical EMAIL AGENT in that all of their settable attribute values are shared Automatic emails will be sent as notification of a selected group of warning and error events that have occurred on the SFA10000 The recipient address is user configurable and only one address is permitted per system To set the email address enter the command Figure 110 UI SET EMAIL IP ADDRESS lt mail server ip address gt IP_PORT lt incoming mail server port gt FROM lt email address gt TO lt email address gt SUBJECT text To show all the email address attributes use the UI SHOW EMAIL ALL command Figure 110 Figure 110 Email Setup Example Screen RAID SNMP RAID SNMP RAID SNMP RAID SNMP RAID IP 0 Agent set with STATUS Success 0 ui set email ip port 25 Agent set with STATUS Success 0 ui set email to jdoe ddn com Agent set with STATUS Success Agent set with STATUS Success 0 ui show email ADDRESS 192 168 0 10
249. st conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Safe Handling e Remove drives to minimize weight e Do not try to lift the enclosure by yourself e Do not lift the SFA10000 by the handles at the front and on the power supply modules on the back they are not designed to support the weight of the enclosure Safety NOTE If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired CAUTION Safety goggles should be worn when maintaining the equipment The SFA10000 MUST be grounded before applying power Unplug the unit if you think that it has become damaged in any way and Warning before you move it CAUTION To maintain proper airflow through the system operate the system with the system top covers closed e Plug in modules are part of the enclosure and must only be removed when a replacement can be immediately installed The system must not be run without all modules in place e In order to comply with applicable safety emission and thermal requirements the top covers should remain closed while running e The SFA10000 system must only be operated from a power supply input voltage range of 200 VAC to 240VAC 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide xiii Preface e A faulty power supply or fan module must be replaced with a fully operational module within 24 hours To minimize the risk of e
250. still online However you must correctly follow the upgrade instructions to perform a successful online upgrade If you are upgrading from v1 0 3 3 xxxx or later there are two methods that can be utilized e Copy the new firmware image over to the controller via the network instead of using a USB flash disk for Linux e Copy the new firmware image over to the controller via the network for Windows users NOTE In the examples the filename of the firmware image is ddn flash 2812 opt tgz and the IP address of the controller is 10 32 31 240 Replace these parameters with the filename and IP address appropriate for your installation 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 89 Firmware Update Management 31121 Linux Environment Firmware Update from the Network Follow these steps to update the firmware 1 Copy the new firmware to both controllers using an scp or sftp client The user name is firmware and the password is Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive For example scp ddn flash 2812 opt tgz firmware 10 32 31 240 2 At the CLUI prompt enter command UPDATE FIRMWARE CONTROLLER LOCAL FILE lt file specification gt For example UPDATE FIRMWARE CONTROLLER LOCAL FILE ddn f lash 2812 opt tgz Note that the file name must be enclosed with double quotation marks 3 Upon completion of reboot login and enter the command SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL Verify t
251. t C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessar
252. tegrity field option or the parity check on read option Figure 46 Create Storage Pool Example 1 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid5 chunk size 64kb physical disk 0x6c Ox6 d Ox6e Ox6f 0x70 POOL 0 OID 0x19b60000 create STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid6 chunk size 128kb number 6 POOL 1 OID 0x19b80001 create STATUS Success 0x0 If you specify the ASSIGN POLICY and NUMBER parameters together Figure 47 only the selected type of disks will be used for the storage pool and you will not need to enter the individual disk name 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 40 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 47 Create Storage Pool Example 2 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid6 chunk size 128kb number 6 assign policy sas POOL 2 OID 0x19b80002 create STATUS Success 0x0 2 Use the CREATE POOL command to add more storage pools as needed If you need to delete a storage pool use the DELETE POOL lt pool id gt command NOTE Storage pool initialization is a background process and multiple storage pools can be initialized simultaneously However virtual disks on a storage pool are NOT accessible until its initialization is complete You may assign a name to a storage pool using the command SET POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt pool name gt To view the list of configured storage pools enter the SHOW POOL command Figure 48 Fig
253. tem Name SFA10000 31 characters max Locate Time 120 seconds 0 65535 Pool Verify Priority C ON OFF Date and Time yyyy mm dd hour 0 23 minutes 0 59 seconds 0 59 Network Time C oN OFF Protocol IP addresses for NTP E Ee Lo 4 Max 4 IP addresses UPDATE NTP Settings NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 It provides a means for the controllers to synchronize their time across a network usually within a small number of milliseconds over a long period of time You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time servers 1 Atthe Set Subsystem Attributes screen Figure 117 select ON to enable NTP 2 Inthe IP Addresses for NTP field enter the IP address of the time servers 3 Click UPDATE to save the changes Please refer to Section 3 7 Network Time Protocol Mode on page 78 for information on behavioral changes when NTP mode is enabled Show Background Jobs To monitor the progress of a job select Subsystem gt Show Background Jobs The Show Background Jobs screen Figure 118 displays the list of current jobs Click on the individual job name to display its detailed information Figure 118 Show Background Job Screen SUBSYSTEM SHOW BACKGROUND JOBS BACKGROUND JOB TYPE STATE TARGET COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED 0x28160006 POOL INIT RUNNING 0x19ab0007 50 13 0x280e0007 POOL INIT RUNNING 0x19ad0008 50 28 BACKGROUND JOB OID 0x28160006
254. terface Kits Host Adapters and Networking Products are limited to a 90 day warranty Software bundled or included with DataDirect Networks solutions are furnished exclusively under the terms of the applicable license agreements Warranty DataDirect Networks warrants that the DataDirect Networks Products accompanied by this limited Warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase from DataDirect Networks or an authorized DataDirect Networks reseller During the term of this Warranty DataDirect Networks will at its option repair or replace any defective parts of the DataDirect Networks products purchased under this Warranty at no additional charge Repair parts or replacement DataDirect Networks products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new When returning the DataDirect Networks products the Purchaser must prepay any shipping charges In addition the Purchaser is responsible for insuring the products returned and assumes the risk of loss during shipment Warranty Claim Requirements Purchaser claims made pursuant to this Warranty must conform to the following requirements 1 The DataDirect Networks products must be returned to a an Authorized DataDirect Networks Servicing Reseller in the country of original purchase or b a DataDirect Networks facility which performs Warranty service in the country of original purchase or c an Au
255. the CD button for 3 seconds to initiate a self test The 15 second test automatically distributes the load to the batteries and tests the battery pack s performance While the test is in progress the indicators cycle through and the alarm sounds Upon completion the UPS returns to normal mode as indicated by the DN and Load indicators If there is a problem with the battery pack the alarm beeps the indicator illuminates andthe indicator flashes Check the battery pack connections and be sure the battery pack is fully charged Call your service representative if the problem persists 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 145 5 6 96 00259 001 Rev C Controller Component Failures Controller Component Failures The controller s Enclosure Fault LED turns amber when a fan failure a power failure or over temperature condition occurs Figure 173 Figure 173 Controller Enclosure Fault LED Indicator Controller Enclosure Fault LED L JO OBBBSBO A single component failure therefore will not shut down the system However in the unlikely event of component failure you can replace the failed component while the SFA10000 is running The replaced component will automatically be returned to service once the component has been installed and booted up immediately If the controller is used with modules missing for more than
256. the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove a
257. ther controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CONTROLLER lt idx gt command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt idx gt command where lt idx gt is index of the controller which was determined in Step 4 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller Physically replace the failing cable Start the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually pools will fail back to the controller that was started DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 152 Appendices 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 153 A Technical Specifications Here are the technical specifications for the SFA10000 10000E NOTE Specifications subject to change without notice Configuration Performance amp Capacity Host side technology SFA10000 16 8Gb Fibre Channel or 8 40Gb InfiniBand Host side technology SFA10000E 16 individual InfiniBand or 10G Ethernet Disk side technology 40 4 x 3Gb s SAS Supported disk technology SAS SATA SSD Management interface RS 232 and Ethernet SSH Cac
258. thorized DataDirect Networks Third Party Service Provider in the country of original purchase 2 The Purchaser must provide proof of purchase and date of purchase from DataDirect Networks or an Authorized DataDirect Networks Reseller 3 The Purchaser may request information on how to obtain warranty service by contacting any Authorized DataDirect Networks Reseller or by writing to the Warranty Service Department DataDirect Networks 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth CA 91311 Disclaimers THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO ANY DATADIRECT NETWORKS PRODUCTS WHICH HAVE BEEN DAMAGED OR RENDERED DEFECTIVE a AS A RESULT OF ACCIDENT MISUSE OR ABUSE b BY THE USE OF PARTS NOT MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY DATADIRECT NETWORKS c BY MODIFICATION WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF DATADIRECT NETWORKS OR d AS A RESULT OF SERVICE BY ANYONE OTHER THAN DATADIRECT NETWORKS AN AUTHORIZED DATADIRECT NETWORKS SERVICING RESELLER OR AN AUTHORIZED DATADIRECT NETWORKS THIRD PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE DATADIRECT NETWORKS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PURPOSE AND DATADIRECT NETWORKS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN IN THE EVENT THE PRODUCTS ARE NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE THE PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL DATADIRECT NE
259. ting the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowing
260. to check the details of the pool The pools will go into WR thru state on initial startup to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The WR Thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in WR Thru mode until the issue is resolved For example CLUI unable to get RAID SUBSYSTEM NAME STATUS MIR Firmware Version Mismatch 0x30003 8 NOTE The firmware will be in MIR firmware version mismatch state for the first controller that is upgraded You must ensure that you have a CLUI prompt from the newly upgraded controller before moving to Step 4 4 Upgrade the second controller by repeating Steps 2 3 above on the other controller 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 91 Firmware Update Management 3113 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure NOTE This is an offline upgrade Any application host should be shutdown or quiesced prior to performing this operation Known Issues When upgrading the enclosure firmware any errors experienced while downloading the firmware will not be realized until the operation is complete and the shelf is power cycled At that time any errors are displayed and it may be necessary to attempt the upgrade a second time It is required that you shutdown one co
261. ugh the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardl
262. uide 85 3 10 4 1 Pause Resume a Job Performance Management You may pause a job at any time using the PAUSE JOB lt idx gt command Figure 95 Figure 95 Pause a Job RAID 0 pause job 0 JOB 0 OID 0x2b010000 paused with STATUS Janus Success 0x0 RAID 0 show job 0 all OID 0x2b010000 Index 0 Target POOL 0x1a520000 Index 0 Sub Target NA Type REBUILD Status PAUSED Completion Status UNKNOWN Priority 50 Fraction Complete 11 Time NA To resume the job enter the command RESUME JOB lt id gt Figure 96 Figure 96 Resume a Job RAID 0 resume job 0 JOB 0 OID 0x2b010000 resumed with STATUS Janus Success 0x0 RAID 0 show job 0 all 3 10 5 96 00259 001 Rev C OID 0x2b010000 Index 0 Target POOL 0x1a520000 Index 0 Sub Target NA Type REBUILD Status RUNNING Priority 50 Time NA Completion Status UNKNOWN Fraction Complete 11 Rebuild Policy Priority Each storage pool has its own rebuild policy settings You may specify the priority values for full rebuild and partial fractional rebuild policies To display the current settings enter the command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 97 Figure 97 Show Pool Information kok Pool s E H HE H E H e a k k Chunk Size Block Size Index 3 OID 0x19b40003 Type STORAGE Name raid 5 set 64KB 0x80 blocks 512 RAID Type RAIDS Free Raid5 Capacity 14576 GB Max VD Size
263. ure 48 Show Pool Information Screen RAID 0 show pool Disk Global Spare Total Free Max Jobs T O spare pool Policy Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings 0 pool 0 NORMAL 128 5 4104 0 0 W RFI 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 5 4104 0 0 W RFI 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 2 pool 2 NORMAL 128 5 4104 0 0 W RET 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 3 pool 3 NORMAL 128 5 6192 0 0 W RETI 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO Total Storage Pools 4 To display the detailed information of a storage pool use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 49 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 41 2 7 10 96 00259 001 Rev C Figure 49 Show Pool All_Attributes Example Screen KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK gt Pool s KKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Index OID Type Name Chunk Size Block Size RAID Type Max VD Size Total Capacity UUID Global Spare Pool DiskTimeout FRT Current Home Future Home Preferred Home Job OID Total Phy Disks State Member Size pID State 0x0001 NORM 0x0002 NORM 0x0003 NORM 0x0004 NORM 0x0005 NORM Free Raid5 Capacity 0 0x19e50000 STORAGE pool 0 128KB 0x100 blocks 512 RAIDS 0 GB 0 GB 600 GB 600000000000000000000180d0000 UNASSIGNED 10 minutes Init Policy ALLOW IO Init Priority 50 Verify Priority 70 Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC
264. ut side of the subsystem In the case of the SFA10000 the stack is defined as the Fibre Channel interface In future versions of the product different interface stacks may exist Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ ONLY controls read only access PRESENT HOME ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user specified LUN number that the virtual disk will show to the host 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 67 Presentations 3 6 1 Discovered Initiator Commands To map a host to a discovered initiator use the command APPLICATION IMPORT DISCOVERED INITIATOR lt initiator id gt HOST lt host id gt To display the currently available initiators use the command APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATORS To display the attributes of a specified initiator use the command APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATORS lt initiator id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES To create an application initiator for the specified host use the command APPLICATION CREATE INITIATOR HOST lt host id gt WWPN lt integer gt To delete the specified initiator use the command APPLICATION DELETE INITIATOR lt initiator id gt 3 6 2 Host Com
265. wer Supply Height 14 356mm includes 2 UPS units Width 17 432mm Depth 25 5 648mm 120 Ibs 54 5 kg Controllers only 248 Ibs 112 5 kg with UPS units 200 240 VAC amp 47 63Hz 1200W 4095BTU hr Height 7 178mm Width 17 432mm Depth 36 914mm without bezel 42 1067 mm with cable management arms 240 Ibs 109kg with disk modules 120 Ibs 54 5 kg without disk modules 200 240 VAC amp 47 63Hz 1750W 5973BTU hr Height 6 97 177 mm Width 16 56 420 6 mm Depth 34 863 6 mm without bezel and cable management arms 38 965 2 mm with bezel and cable management arms 215 Ibs 97 7 kg with disk modules 105 Ibs 47 7 kg without disk modules 190 264 VAC 47 63Hz 1865W 96 00259 001 Rev C DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 155 Technical Specifications Physical Power amp Environmental 552460 Dimensions Height 3 5 890 mm Disk Enclosure Width 17 6 447 mm Depth 19 3 490 mm Weight 53 Ibs 27 kg with disk modules Voltage range 100 240 VAC amp 50 60 Hz Maximum average 550W output power Operating environment 5 C to 35 C 20 80 non condensing temperature relative humidity Non operating environment 10 C to 50 C 20 80 non condensing temperature relative humidity Agency certifications UL CE cUL C Tick FCC NOTE Specifications subject to change without notice 96 00259 001 Rev
266. x0 RAID 0 ui set snmp community public SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui show snmp SNMP Trap Agent Attributes IP_ADDRESS 192 168 0 10 COMMUNITY public Inquiry Items and Events Table 3 Table 4 and Table 5 below detail the additional inquiry items and events that will be trapped in the SNMP MIB and in the Email Agent Table 3 SNMP Inquiry Objects SNMP Inquiry Objects Item Returned Values Temperature Sensor Number of temperature sensors list of temperature sensors For each sensor ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status normal warning critical Fans Number of fans in the system list of fans For each fan ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status healthy failure Power Supplies Number of power supplies in the system list of power supplies For each power supply ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status healthy failure Pools Number of pools list of pools For each pool OID type storage spare unassigned access number of members Physical Disks List of disks for each disk WWN enclosure number slot status normal failed predicted failure unknown DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E SFA OS V1 4 0 User Guide 103 96 00259 001 Rev C Table 4 SNMP Only Events Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP ONLY Events Error Description LOG_AMPD_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED A device failed to init
267. x2001001b328e0280 0x2001001b328e0280 2 00004 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32ae176c 0x2001001b32ae176c 1 00005 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328eb580 0x2001001b328eb580 10 00006 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32aeb280 0x2001001b32aeb280 2 00007 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328e176c 0x2001001b328e176c 1 00008 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328e096c 0x2101001b328e096c 3 Total FC Initiators 8 2 Create a host Enter the command Figure 60 APPLICATION CREATE HOST NAME lt host name gt OSTYPE LINUX WINDOWS MAC OS DEFAULT GENERIC where lt host name gt is an assigned host name to help make mapping simpler for the user lt os type gt is the mode which can be set to characteristics specific to an Operating System especially for Mac OSX Use the APPLICATION CREATE HOST command to create more hosts as needed If you need to delete a host use the APPLICATION DELETE HOST lt host id gt command To display the current settings enter the command APP SHOW HOST Figure 60 Create Host Examples RAIDS app create host name serverl portl ostype linux HOST 0 OID 0x18d0000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAIDS app create host name serverl port2 ostype linux HOST 1 OID 0x18e0001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAIDS app show host Stack Host Mode Attributes Index OS Type Characteristics 00000 serverl portl 00000 LINUX 0x000000000000001 00001 serverl port2 00001 LINUX 0x000000000000001 Index Host Name Total Hosts 2
268. y For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not Igpl html gt Copyright C 1997 Massachusetts Institute of Technology This software is being provided by the copyright holders under the following license By obtaining using and or copying this software you agree that you have read understood and will comply with the following terms and conditions Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee or royalty is hereby granted provided that the full text of this NOTICE appears on ALL copies of the software and documentation or portions thereof including modifications that you make THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND COPYRIGHT HOLDERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY WAY OF EXAMPLE BUT NOT LIMITATION COPYRIGHT HOLDERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THI
269. ys other 1 B 1 3 1 2 6962 0000 RUNNING LOCAL z 730 NONE controller UPDATE FIRMWARE FOR CONTROLLER B Select Firmware file Browse NOTE In order to update the other controller connect to the other controller using the gui and follow the same steps UPDATE FIRMWARE View System Logs To view the system logs select Controllers gt View Log At the View Log Entries screen Figure 125 select the display options and click VIEW LOGS to display the log Figure 126 Figure 125 View Log Entries Screen CONTROLLERS VIEW LOG ENTRIES UP TIME RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX CONTROLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE ore LOCALIREMOTE PRIMARY days CRASHDUMP ITP PENDING ENABLED INTERVENTION AME VERSION VERSION hh mm ENABLED ESS SYNC Y 0 days other 0 A 1 3 1 2 6962 0000 RUNNING REMOTE 7 27 D NONE conse 0 days other 1 B 1 3 1 2 6962 0000 RUNNING LOCAL ed 7 40 NONE Gerona CONTROLLER A Order of log entries OLDER EVENTS NEWER EVENTS Print direction ASCENDING DESCENDING Count of log entries 100 Starting log sequence fo mber nu VIEW LOGS Figure 126 View Log Screen CONTROLLERS VIEW LOG ENTRIES UP TIME g RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX Sepe FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOGAUREMOTE PRIMARY days CRASHDUMP NTP VERSION VERSION STATE rmmmy PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION syng 1 3 1 2 0 days other 0 A E
270. zation policy gt Allow IO NO IO Priority 1 99 where 99 puts all system resources on the initialization You may either explicitly select the disks for the pool by using PHYSICAL DISK or specify the number of disks in the pool by using NUMBER in which case the next available disks will be selected If you specify the ASSIGN POLICY and NUMBER parameters together only the selected type of disks will be used for the storage pool and you will not need to enter the individual disk name You may disable the SATAssure feature or enable it to use either the data integrity field option or the parity check on read option Examples e To use only the specified disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID5 CHUNK SIZE 64KB PHYSICAL DISK 62 63 64 65 66 e To use the next available disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID6 CHUNK SIZE 128KB NUMBER 6 e To use only the selected type of disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID6 CHUNK_SIZE 128KB NUMBER 6 ASSIGN_POLICY SAS 3 3 3 Storage Pool Initialization When a storage pool is created initialization begins automatically and will continue in the background until it is completed You may use the SHOW POOL command to check if the storage pool is being initialized see Section 3 3 1 Display Storage Pool Information for more information You may monitor the initialization progress using the SHOW JOB command see Section 3 10 4 Background Job Priority for more information 3 3 3 1 Initialization Job Fai

DDN SFA10000 (SFA OS V1.4.0) User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents